Yamaha RX-A3030 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-A3030

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

English

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.

En 2

CONTENTS

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

FEATURES 6

What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

PREPARATIONS 17

General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

5 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 50

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

PLAYBACK 61

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch

(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD/CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

HD Radio™ tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

En 3

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . 91

Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Preparing the multi zone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources

(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

CONFIGURATIONS 104

Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound

Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109

Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 133

Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 134

ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Registering remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Editing device names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

Operating multiple functions at once (macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142

Resetting the remote control configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

APPENDIX 147

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

En 4

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Accessories En 5

Accessories

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

 Remote control  Batteries (x4)

 AM antenna  FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region

of purchase.

 YPAO microphone  Microphone base

(RX-A3030 only)

*Using for angle measurement

during YPAO.

 Power cable

*The supplied power cable varies

depending on the region of purchase.

 CD-ROM

(Owner’s Manual)

 Easy Setup Guide  Safety Brochure

Insert the batteries the right way

round.

*RX-A3030: AAA, LR03, UM-4

RX-A2030: AAA, R03, UM-4

Operating range of the remote control

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range

shown below.

• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-A3030

(U.S.A. model), unless otherwise specified.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.

• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”

and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.

• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

30° 30°

Within

6 m (20 ft)

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6

FEATURES

What you can do with the unit

Speakers

BD/DVD player

HDMI Control

Audio/Video

TV remote control

Audio

HDMI Control

Audio

Audio/Video

Sequential operation of a TV,

AV receiver, and BD/DVD

player (HDMI Control)

. p.161

Supports 2- to 9-channel (plus rear presence) speaker

system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows

you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles.

• Automatically optimizing the speaker

settings to suit your room (YPAO)

. p.50

• Reproducing stereo or multichannel

sounds with the sound fields like

actual movie theaters and concert halls

(CINEMA DSP)

. p.65

• Enjoying compressed music with

enhanced sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)

. p.69

• Bi-amp connections, channel

expansion (with external power-amp)

and multi-zone configurations to

enhance your system

. p.24

iPod/iPhone/iPad

USB device

Network contents

Wide variety of supported content

• iPod/iPhone/iPad

. p.77

•USB

. p.81

• Media server (PC/NAS)

. p.84

• Internet radio

. p.87

•AirPlay

. p.89

3D and 4K signals supported

AV receiver (the unit)

Change the input source and favorite

settings with one touch (SCENE)

. p.62

Audio

Control

Audio/Video

(via HDMI/MHL)

Smartphone/Tablet

Control

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7

Full of useful functions!

❑ Connecting various devices (p.41)

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks

on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as

BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),

game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound

with a single HDMI cable connection

(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.35)

When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one

HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio

input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control

signals.

❑ Easy operation and wireless music

playback from iPhone or Android device

By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV

CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an

iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the

Yamaha website for details.

❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.70)

The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You

can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.

❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.69)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays

back the selected source with the least circuitry, which

lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

❑ Easy operation with a TV screen

You can navigate through different types of content

(such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or

easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu.

❑ Low power consumption

The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the

unit’s power consumption (p.132).

❑ Operating external devices with the

supplied remote control

You can operate external devices with the supplied

remote control by registering the remote control codes

of the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD

players) (p.138).

❑ Backlight illumination

remote control

The backlight illumination allows you to easily operate

the remote control even in a dark home theater room.

BD/DVD

player

Game

console

Camcorder

Set-top box

HDMI Control

TV audio

Video from

external device

Useful tips

I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for

video and non-HDMI for audio...

Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the

type of an audio input jack to be used for the

corresponding input source (p.102).

Video and audio are not synchronized...

Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay

between video and audio output (p.120).

I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...

Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the

output destination of signals input into the unit (p.124).

Your TV speakers may be selected as an output

destination.

I want to change the on-screen menu language...

Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a

language from English, Japanese, French, German,

Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.49).

I want to update the firmware...

Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu

to update the unit’s firmware (p.137). If the unit is

connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed

on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.146).

Many other settings are available that let you to

customize the unit. For details, see the following

pages.

• Input settings (p.104)

• SCENE settings (p.107)

• Sound program and surround decoder settings

(p.110)

• Various function settings (p.113)

• Information view (such as audio signal and video

signal) (p.133)

• System settings (p.135)

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 8

The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these

experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires for more than 20 years, and

this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers.

What is a sound field?

We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not

only as the sounds that are heard directly but also as

the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been

reflected by the walls or ceiling of the building. The

character of the reflected and reverberant sound is

affected by the shape, size, and material of the building,

and all of these sounds taken together are what give us

the auditory sensation of being in that specific place.

This unique acoustical character of a specific space is

what we call the “sound field”.

Conceptual diagram of a concert hall's sound field

Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit

CINEMA DSP/CINEMA DSP 3D

Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of

acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound fields of

concert halls and performance spaces around the

world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this data to be applied to

create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of

sound programs using CINEMA DSP.

By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the

content of the playback source such as movies, music,

or games, you can maximize the acoustical

effectiveness of that specific content. (For example, a

sound program designed for movies can give you the

sensation of actually being in that scene.)

In addition, the “CINEMA DSP 3D” function uses

3-dimensional sound field data that includes the axis of

height, generating an even more realistic sound field

with a spatial sense.

CINEMA DSP HD

“CINEMA DSP HD³” is Yamaha's flagship 3D sound field

playback technology that takes full advantage of the

massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the

sound field data. With support for rear presence speaker

output, it delivers more than twice as much capability for

generating acoustic reflections as conventional CINEMA

DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability,

delivering an utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field.

Capability for reproducing reflections

(when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected)

CINEMA DSP

CINEMA DSP HD³

Level

CINEMA DSP 3D

Time

The included YPAO microphone can be used to analyze

the environment so that this information can be used to

automatically adjust various settings for the speakers and

the sound field. This allows the distinctive character of the

content you are hearing to be maximized, and optimizes

the effectiveness of Yamaha's sound field generating

technology for your specific listening environment.

YPAO-R.S.C.

In rooms that have not been designed or constructed

with acoustics in mind, reflections from the walls or

ceiling can cause problems such as a blurred

low-frequency range or a smearing of the acoustical

image. “YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only

the unwanted reflections that can be difficult to avoid in

a typical home. This corrects the tonal changes and

inconsistencies in the sound field that can occur due to

speaker placement, thus creating a listening

environment comparable to that of a room specifically

designed for acoustic perfection.

Angle measurement

The direction (angle) of the front

speakers, surround speakers,

and presence speakers as seen

from the listening position is

measured, and compensation

is applied to the sound field in

order to maximize the

effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP sound field.

Optimizing speaker settings

for the environment (YPAO)

Compensation

Time

Level

Microphone base

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 9

High-resolution music enhancer

Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can

be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz content such as from a

CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening

of the musicality in the original content (p.102)

Before processing

After processing

High-quality video processing

From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc)

images, any content can be played back as a

high-quality image (p.122).

• Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing

• Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection

• Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each

input source

You can also apply fine touches such as detail

enhancement and edge enhancement.

Unrivaled audio and video quality

Frequency

Loudness

Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz

signal (such as a CD)

Frequency

Loudness

Playback bandwidth of a

88.2/96 kHz signal

Support for bi-amp connections and

external power amp expansion

To obtain even high audio quality, you can connect front

speakers that support power amp expansion, or

expand your system by adding an external power amp

(such as a Hi-Fi amp).

For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration”

(p.24).

The best expandability in Yamaha

By connecting an external power amp,

you can enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP

- an 11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field.

(Example)

Multi-zone function

The multi-zone function (p.91) allows you to play back

different input sources in the room where the unit is

installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2).

(The following shows examples of use.)

Enjoying music using speakers in another room

While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living

room, you can listen to music through the speakers of a

different room.

Enjoying videos using a TV in another room

(HDMI connection)

While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living

room, you can enjoy videos and music being input via

HDMI on a TV in a different room.

Expandable to meet diverse needs

External power amp

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(such as Zone2)

Living room (main zone)

Kitchen

(such as Zone4)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10

Front panel

1 MAIN ZONE z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator

Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the

following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.124)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.125)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.126)

• An iPod is being charged (p.77)

3 Front display

Displays information (p.12).

4 Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.5).

5 PURE DIRECT key

Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.69).

6 INPUT knob

Selects an input source.

7 Front panel door

For protecting controls and jacks (p.11).

8 VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

Part names and functions

INPUT

MAIN ZONE

VOLUME

PURE DIRECT

ENTER

OPTION

ON SCREEN

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

5V 2.1A

SCENE

1234

RLAUDIO

HDMI/

OPTICAL

INFO

MEMORY

FM AM

TUNING

PRESET

MHL

4 5231

Opening the front panel door

• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently

press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed

when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.

(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11

■ Inside of the front panel door

9 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

0 Menu operations keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

A OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.99).

B DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.98).

C TONE/BALANCE key

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of output sounds (p.100).

Adjusts the right/left channel volume balance for Zone2 or

Zone3 (p.97).

D STRAIGHT key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.68).

E PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.64).

F SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.62).

G MULTI ZONE keys

ZONE 2–4 Enables/disables the audio output to

each zone (p.96).

ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone that is controlled by

the keys and knobs on the front panel

(p.96).

H INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.98).

I MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.71).

J FM and AM keys

Switch between FM and AM (p.70).

K PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.71).

L TUNING keys

Select the radio frequency (p.70).

M USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.81) or an iPod

(p.77).

N YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.50).

O PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

P VIDEO AUX jacks

For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game

console (p.44, 45) or a smartphone (p.44).

ENTER

OPTION

ON SCREEN

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

5V 2.1A

SCENE

1234

RLAUDIO

HDMI/

OPTICAL

INFO

MEMORY

FM AM

TUNING

PRESET

MHL

BE JL9ACD HIK0FG

MNO P

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 12

Front display (indicators)

1 HDMI

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.

OUT1/OUT2

Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI

signal.

2 STEREO

Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED

Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

signal.

(U.S.A. model only)

Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station

signal.

3 ZONE indicators

Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.96).

4 PA RT Y

Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.97)

5 Information display

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound

mode name). You can switch the information by pressing

INFO (p.98).

6 MUTE

Blinks when audio is muted.

7 Volume indicator

Indicates the current volume.

8 ADAPTIVE DRC

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.100) is working.

9 ENHANCER

Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.69) is

working.

0 CINEMA DSP indicator

(RX-A3030)

“CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.65) is

working. “CINEMA DSP ! ” lights up when CINEMA DSP

HD³ is activated.

(RX-A2030)

“CINEMA DSP” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.65) is

working. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D

is activated.

A SLEEP

Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

B Cursor indicators

Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

C Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

A Front speaker (L)

S Front speaker (R)

D Center speaker

F Surround speaker (L)

G Surround speaker (R)

H Surround back speaker (L)

J Surround back speaker (R)

K Surround back speaker

Z Front/rear presence speakers (L)

X Front/rear presence speakers (R)

C Subwoofer (1)

V Subwoofer (2)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED PARTY

ZONE

9 BCB

3 4

(RX-A3030 U.S.A. model)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 13

Rear panel

1 PHONO jacks

For connecting to a turntable (p.43).

2 DC OUT jack

For connecting to an optional accessory.

3 NETWORK jack

For connecting to a network (p.46).

4 AV 1–4 jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.41).

5 AV OUT jacks

For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a

VCR) (p.47).

6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

(composite video/S-video) jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports composite video or

S-video and outputting video signals (p.39) or for connecting

to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.93).

7 HDMI OUT 1 jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.35). When using ARC, TV audio signal

can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

8 HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.40), or for connecting to an

HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.94).

9 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–4) jacks

For connecting to video playback devices that support

component video and inputting video signals (p.41).

0 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.41).

A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (component video)

jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports component video and

outputting video signals (p.39) or for connecting to a zone

video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.93).

B REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks

For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that

allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another

room (p.95).

C TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks

For connecting to devices that support the trigger function

(p.48).

D RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.

Consult your dealer for details.

E VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model only)

Selects the switch position according to your local voltage

(p.48).

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

AV 1

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV O UT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

12V 0.1A

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

21 3 7 8 D5 6 CA B904

* The area around the video/audio output

jacks is marked in white on the actual

product to prevent improper connections.

(RX-A3030 U.S.A. model)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 14

F ANTENNA jacks

For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.45).

G AUDIO 1–4 jacks

For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting

audio signals (p.43).

H MULTI CH INPUT jacks

For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel

output and inputting audio signals (p.47).

I ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks (RX-A3030)

For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or

Zone3 and outputting audio (p.92), or for connecting to an

external power amplifier for front presence or rear presence

channels (p.33).

ZONE OUT jacks (RX-A2030)

For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or

Zone3 and outputting audio (p.92).

J PRE OUT jacks

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.22) or

to an external power amplifier (p.33).

K SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.18).

L AC IN jack

For connecting the supplied power cable (p.48).

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

AV 1

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV O UT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

12V 0.1A

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

K LGF I JH

* The area around the video/audio output

jacks is marked in white on the actual

product to prevent improper connections.

(RX-A3030 U.S.A. model)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 15

Remote control

1 Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

2 SOURCE z key

Turns on/off an external device.

SOURCE/RECEIVER key

Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is

operated with the remote control (p.140). You can operate

the unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external

device when this key lights up in green.

RECEIVER z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

3 Display window

Displays remote control information.

4 Input selection keys

Select an input source for playback.

AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks

V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks

PHONO PHONO jacks

MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks

USB USB jack (on the front panel)

NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a

desired network source)

TUNER FM/AM radio

[A], [B], [C] Change the external device to operate with the

remote control without switching the input

source.

5 SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.62).

6 PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program (p.64).

7 External device operation keys

Let you play back and perform other operations for external

devices (p.140).

8 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

9 Menu operation keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

0 MODE key

Switches the iPod operation modes (p.79).

(U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program

(p.72).

A PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.71).

B TV operation keys

Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV

operations (p.139).

C VOLUME keys

Adjust the volume.

D MUTE key

Mutes the audio output.

E OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.99).

F LIGHT key (RX-A3030 only)

Turns on the backlight of the remote control keys for about 10

seconds.

G DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.98).

H Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.64).

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-AUX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP M ENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

(RX-A3030)

FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 16

■ Inside of the remote control cover

I Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.64).

J INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.98).

K Numeric keys

Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

L ZONE key

Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control

(p.96).

M PA RT Y k ey

Turns on/off the party mode (p.97).

N HDMI OUT key

Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output

(p.61).

O Radio keys

Operate the FM/AM radio (p.70).

MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets.

FM Switches to FM radio.

AM Switches to AM radio.

TUN./CH Select the radio frequency.

P SLEEP key

Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a

specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press

repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,

off).

Q LEVEL key

Adjusts the volume of each speaker (p.119).

R SETUP key

Switches the remote control to the setup mode (p.138).

• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a

remote control code for each device before using (p.138).

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-AUX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP M ENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PA RT Y

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

(RX-A3030)

PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 17

PREPARATIONS

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

General setup procedure

1 Connecting speakers (p.18)

Basic speaker configuration (p.19)

Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.

Advanced speaker configuration (p.24)

Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone

configurations to enhance the system.

2 Connecting a TV (p.35)

Connect a TV to the unit.

3 Connecting playback devices (p.41)

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.45)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

5 Connecting to a network (p.46)

Connect the unit to a network.

6 Connecting other devices (p.47)

Connect external devices such as recording devices.

7 Connecting the power cable (p.48)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

Selecting an on-screen menu language

(p.49)

Select the desired on-screen menu language.

Optimizing the speaker settings

automatically (YPAO) (p.50)

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room

(YPAO).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 18

The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.24).

Functions of each speaker

• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the

speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker

settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.

• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”

and “SBR” in the diagram).

• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to

produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we

recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and

rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds).

• (RX-A3030 only)

The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to

produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear

presence speakers.

Ideal speaker layout

1 Connecting speakers

Caution

• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.21).

Speaker type Abbr. Function

Front (L) 1

Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Front (R) 2

Center 3

Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and

vocals).

Surround (L) 4 Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers

also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround

back speakers are connected.

Surround (R) 5

Surround back (L) 6

Produce surround back right/left channel sounds.

Surround back (R) 7

Front presence (L) E

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA

DSP HD³ (RX-A3030) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-A2030) (p.65), the

presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in

your room.

Front presence (R) R

Rear presence (L) T

Rear presence (R) Y

Subwoofer 9

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and

reinforces bass parts of other channels.

This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the

unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the room.

T Y

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

10°~30°10°~30°

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 19

Basic speaker configuration

■ Placing speakers in your room

Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.

❑ 9.2+2-channel system

(using both surround back and rear presence speakers)

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy

a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

• The surround back speakers and rear presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit

automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected sound program (p.65).

• (RX-A3030 only)

You can make an 11-channel system by using an external power amplifier (p.25).

❑ 9.2-channel system (using rear presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a

highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.

6 7

T Y

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 20

❑ 9.2-channel system (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds

using the surround back speakers.

• (RX-A3030 only)

This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround

speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.

❑ 7.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.

• (RX-A3030 only)

This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround

speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field.

❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,

center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows

you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

❑ 5.1-channel system

This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front,

center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for

enjoying 5.1-channel contents.

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 21

❑ Front 5.1-channel system

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front

speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).

❑ 2.1-channel system

Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround

speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound

(Virtual CINEMA DSP).

• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.

■ Setting the speaker impedance

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting

6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also

use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall

outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press

MAIN ZONE z.

Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the

power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

8MIN

SPEAKERIMP.

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 22

■ Connecting speakers

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

Speakers to be connected

If you have nine speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or rear

presence speakers (*2). If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back

speakers (*3) or front presence speakers (*4). If you have five speakers, use two of

them as surround speakers (*5) or front presence speakers (*6).

• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers,

configure the “SWFR Layout” setting (p.118) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC

wall outlet.

• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an

external power amplifier” (p.33).

Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

Connection diagram

Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the

speakers.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the

unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,

“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

Room Speaker type Abbr.

Speaker system

(the number of channels)

Power Amp

Assign

(p.116)

9+2 9 7 5 2

Main zone

Front (L) 1 ●●●●●

Basic (default)

Front (R) 2 ●●●●●

Center 3 ●●●●

Surround (L) 4 ●●●*5

Surround (R) 5 ●●●*5

Surround back (L) 6 ● *1 *3

Surround back (R) 7 ● *1 *3

Front presence (L) E ●●*4 *6

Front presence (R) R ●●*4 *6

Rear presence (L) T ● *2

Rear presence (R) Y ● *2

–

UC U

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

UO3

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

6 7

The unit (rear)

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 23

❑ Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the

unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are

colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire

to the positive terminal.

a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and

twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.

b Loosen the speaker terminal.

c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the

terminal.

d Tighten the terminal.

Using a banana plug

(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)

a Tighten the speaker terminal.

b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

FRONT

+ (red)

– (black)

FRONT

Banana plug

(

SINGLE

)

PRE OUT

CENTER

SUR. BACKSURRUND

FRONT

(

REAR

)

SUBWOOFER

(

FRONT

)

Audio pin cable

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 24

Advanced speaker configuration

In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.19), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.

Using the four internal

amplifiers for front speakers to

have more high-quality sounds

(Example) (Example) (Example)

Bi-amp

connection

Combining with an external

power amplifier (Hi-Fi

amplifier, etc.) to build an

extended system

Using the excess internal

amplifiers for stereo speakers

in another room

External power

amplifier

Main zone

Zone2

Bi-amp connection Power-amp channel expansion Multi-zone configuration

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 25

■ Available speaker configurations

(RX-A3030)

(RX-A2030)

• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.116)

in the “Setup” menu.

• When applying a multi-zone configuration, you can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the

EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to

the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks. The following explanation is based

on the assumption that you have not changed the default zone assignments.

Speaker configuration

Main zone

Multi-zone Power Amp Assign (p.116) Page

Output channel

(max)

Bi-amp

External power

amplifier (required)

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone 7  7ch BI-AMP 26

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and multi-zone speakers 7  +1 room 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE 26

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and power-amp channel

expansion (for presence channels)

11 

Front presence

Rear presence

7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP 27

Using power-amp channel expansion (for front and/or presence

channels)

11 Rear Presence 9ch +RP 27

11 Front 9ch +FRONT 28

Front presence

Rear presence

7ch +FP+RP 28

Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and

multi-zone speakers

9 Front +1 room 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE 29

7 Front +2 rooms 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE 29

Using multi-zone speakers

7 +1 room 7ch +1ZONE 30

9 +1 room 9ch +1ZONE 30

7 +2 rooms 7ch +2ZONE 31

Speaker configuration

Main zone

Multi-zone Power Amp Assign (p.116) Page

Output channel

(max)

Bi-amp

External power

amplifier (required)

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone 7  7ch BI-AMP 26

Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and multi-zone speakers 7  +1 room 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE 26

Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and

multi-zone speakers

9 Front +1 room 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE 29

7 Front +2 rooms 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE 29

Using multi-zone speakers

7 +1 room 7ch +1ZONE 30

9 +1 room 9ch +1ZONE 30

7 +2 rooms 7ch +2ZONE 31

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 26

❑ 7ch BI-AMP ❑ 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE

Bi-amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Bi-amp

Main zone

Zone3

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.96), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 27

❑ 7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP (RX-A3030 only) ❑ 9ch +RP (RX-A3030 only)

6 7

Bi-amp

via external amp

via

external amp

via

external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting

external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.92).

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

6 7

via

external amp

via

external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an

external amplifier for Zone3 (p.92).

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER EXTRA SP 1

TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 28

❑ 9ch +FRONT (RX-A3030 only) ❑ 7ch +FP+RP (RX-A3030 only)

6 7

via external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an

external amplifier for Zone3 (p.92).

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER EXTRA SP 1

TY EXTRA SP 2

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

6 7

via external amp

via

external amp

via

external amp

• When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting

external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.92).

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 29

❑ 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE ❑ 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE

via external amp

Main zone

Zone3

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER EXTRA SP 1

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

Zone2

Zone3

Main zone

via external amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 30

❑ 7ch +1ZONE ❑ 9ch +1ZONE

Main zone

Zone2

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1

Main zone

Zone3

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.96), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER EXTRA SP 1

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 31

❑ 7ch +2ZONE

Zone2

Zone3

Main zone

• When Zone3 output is enabled (p.96), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

TY (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1

Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 32

■

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the

FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP 1 terminals.

To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.116) in the

“Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

• The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP 1 terminals output the same signals.

■ Connecting Zone2/3 speakers

When using Zone2/3 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals.

To utilize the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals for Zone2/3 speakers, configure the “Power Amp

Assign” setting (p.116) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC

wall outlet.

• You can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign”

(p.116) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is

assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks.

• You can also connect Zone2 and Zone3 speakers using an external amplifier (p.92).

Caution

• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a

tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp

connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker

cables.

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

The unit (rear)

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

The unit (rear)

Main zone

Zone2

Zone3

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 33

■ Connecting an external power amplifier

When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker

output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.

The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

1 F.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3030 only)

Output front presence channel audio signals or Zone2 audio signals depending on the “Power

Amp Assign” setting (p.116).

2 R.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3030 only)

Output rear presence channel audio signals or Zone3 audio signals depending on the “Power

Amp Assign” setting (p.116).

3 FRONT jacks

Output front channel sounds.

4 SURROUND jacks

Output surround channel sounds.

5 SUR. BACK jacks

Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect

the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).

6 CENTER jack

Outputs center channel sounds.

(Example)

Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier

About external power amplifiers

We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.

• With unbalanced inputs

• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)

• Output power: about 100 W (6 to 8 )

Caution

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making

connections.

– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.

– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.

– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of

the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to

the pre-main amplifier.

HDMI

/DVD)

AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 4

AC IN

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

12V 0.1A

321 4 56

The unit (rear)

V 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

PB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

3 /

NSE

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

E 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

12V 0.1A

MAIN IN

FRONT

The unit (rear)

PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks

Main input jack

Amplifier with

volume control

bypass

(such as A-S2000)

Speaker connections

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 34

■ Video/audio jacks

❑ HDMI jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using

a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality

degradation.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return

Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission features.

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.

❑ HDMI/MHL jack

Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL

cable.

• The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both

HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on

your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an

HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an

HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL

connection” (p.44).

■ Video jacks

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three

components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P

B),

and chrominance red (P

R). Use a component video

cable with three plugs.

❑ S VIDEO jack

Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y)

and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video

cable.

❑ VIDEO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

■ Audio jacks

❑ OPTICAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical

cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before

using the cable.

❑ COAXIAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial

cable.

❑ AUDIO jacks

Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin

cable (RCA cable).

Input/output jacks and cables

AV 1

HDMI cable

MHL cable

COMPONEN

AV 1

Component video cable

S-video cable

AV 1

Video pin cable

Digital optical cable

Digital coaxial cable

Stereo pin cable

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 35

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks

available on your TV.

Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.

■

Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters

(p.124) in the “Setup” menu.

• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

• Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,

regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”

(p.159).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.40).

2 Connecting a TV

About HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV

that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s

power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback

devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the

unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.161).

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a

TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you

can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

Does your TV support

Audio Return Channel (ARC)?

Does your TV support

HDMI Control?

Does your TV have an

HDMI input jack?

■ Connection Method 3 (p.38)

■ Connection Method 2 (p.37)

■ Connection Method 1 (p.35)

■ Connection Method 4 (p.39)

Yes

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

SURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC (ZONE OUT)

HDMI

ARC

HDMI

HDMI OUT 1 jack

HDMI input

(ARC-compatible)

The unit (rear)

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 36

❑ Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)

and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.

b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

c Press ON SCREEN.

d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

g Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

h Press ON SCREEN.

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.

d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

e Check the following.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be

automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu is set

to “On”.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)

the devices. It may solve the problem.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio

cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.37).

• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1

jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use

the SCENE function (p.62), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

RETURN DISPLAY

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

RETURN

OPTI

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 37

■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or

stereo pin cable).

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters

(p.124) in the “Setup” menu.

• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,

regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”

(p.159).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.40).

❑ Necessary settings

To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback

devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and

playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

b Press ON SCREEN.

c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

g Press ON SCREEN.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUDI O 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

SURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC (ZONE OUT)

HDMI

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 1 jack

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

HDMI input

RETURN DISPLAY

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

RETURN

OPTI

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 38

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

e Check the following.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,

select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or

adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.

If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be

automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)

the devices. It may solve the problem.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1

jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use

the SCENE function (p.62), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or

stereo pin cable).

If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the

remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,

regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”

(p.159).

• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4

jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.62), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.40).

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

SURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC (ZONE OUT)

HDMI

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 1 jack

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

HDMI input

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 39

■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)

Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following

connections.

If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the

remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be

output to the TV. Also, analog videos that can be output to the TV differ according to the “Analog to Analog

Conversion” setting in the “Setup” menu. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.159).

• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4

jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.62), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)

❑ S VIDEO connection (with an S-video cable)

❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

V OUT

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDI O 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP2

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video input

(component video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

SURROU

COAXIAL

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

S VIDEO

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO) jack

Video input (S-video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

SURROU

COAXIAL

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack

Video input (S-video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 40

■ Connecting another TV or a projector

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit

with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching

videos with the remote control (p.61).

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video

monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor

(p.94).

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/D

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

SURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

HDMI

HDMI OUT

ARC (ZONE OUT)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI input

Projector

TV (already connected)

1 2

TV connection

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 41

The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow

you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect

an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.

• Connecting an iPod (p.77)

• Connecting a USB storage device (p.81)

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game

consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video

device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI

connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than

HDMI.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.129) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ,

D ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.102) in the “Option” menu.

■ HDMI connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

■ Component video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable

(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the

unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

3 Connecting playback devices

OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIG

B PR

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 4

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACKURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

12V

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI output

Video device

HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Component video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3

YPB PR YPB PR

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV O UT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OU

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

YPB PR

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(component video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 42

■ S-video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an S-video cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

S-video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (S VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3–4 (S VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (S VIDEO + AUDIO)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

S VIDEO

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4

(S VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(S-video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Composite video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(composite video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 43

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.

Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the

following connections.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.129) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL

(c, d, e) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.102) in the “Option” menu.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote

control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.

Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit

Digital coaxial

AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)

AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3–4 (OPTICAL)

AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–4 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO)

Turntable (PHONO) PHONO

When connecting a turntable

• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a

low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.

• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/

AV 1

YPB

AV 1

AV 2

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUDI O 3AUDIO 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

FRONT

SURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

PHONO

GND

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PHONO

GND

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4

(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks

The unit

(rear)

Audio device

PHONO jacks

Audio output

(PHONO)

Turntable

Ground lead

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 44

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.

Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see

“Connecting an iPod” (p.77) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.81).

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on

the unit.

❑ HDMI connection

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the

unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the

video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI

OUT jack of the unit (p.35 to 38).

• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.

• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output from

the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT jacks by default. You can change the video out setting in “Video Out”

(p.105) in the “Input” menu.

❑ MHL connection

Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an

MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the

mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input

videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the mobile device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI

OUT jack of the unit (p.35 to 38).

• You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device.

• If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device.

• You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and

numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the

mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself.

• If “Standby Through” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio

to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby

mode.

• The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions.

– The unit is turned on.

– The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

VIDEO AUX

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

5V 2.1A

RLAUDIO

HDMI/

OPTICAL

MHL

HDMI

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

ENTER

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

5V 2.1A

RLAUDIO

HDMI/

OPTICAL

MHL

Mobile device

MHL output

The unit (front)

1 2 3

Playback device connections

4 5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 45

❑ Composite video/analog stereo/digital optical connection

Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a

video pin cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable).

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the device will be output from the unit.

• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX

(VIDEO/AUDIO/OPTICAL) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL

IN) jack.

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.

ENTER

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4

ZONE CONTROL

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

5V 2.1A

RLAUDIO

HDMI/

OPTICAL

MHL

V RL

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas

• The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase.

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV O UT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDI O 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SU

EXTRA SP2

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

FM antenna

AM antenna

The unit (rear)

1 2 3

Playback device connections

FM/AM antenna connections

5 6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 46

Assembling the AM antenna

Connecting the AM antenna

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5

or higher straight cable).

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and

Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,

as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to

configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network

parameters manually (p.125).

• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

“Network” (p.134) in the “Information” menu.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)

may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the

security software or firewall settings appropriately.

• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.

• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

Hold down Insert Release

5 Connecting to a network

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV

YPB PR

B PR

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDI O 3AUDI O 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESEN

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

ZONE

COAXIAL

R L

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

LAN

WAN

Network Attached Storage

(NAS)

Internet

Modem

Router

Network cable

The unit (rear)

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

1 2 3 4

FM/AM antenna connections

Network connections

6 7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 47

Connecting recording devices

You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks

output video/audio signals selected as the input.

• The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO

jacks.

• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.

Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output

You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an

SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,

the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using

“Video Out” (p.105) in the “Input” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the

MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.

• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing

speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker

configuration.

• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are

not available.

6 Connecting other devices

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 2

AV O UT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

OPTICAL

AUDI O 4AUDIO 3AUDI O 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

SURROU

COAXIAL

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

VIDEO

S VIDEO

AUDIO

OPTICAL

AV OUT

The unit (rear)

AV OUT jacks

Video/audio input

Video/audio

recording device

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3

YPB PR YPB P

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDI O 3AUDIO 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZON

F.P RE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

NNA

adio

(4 RADIO)

MULTI CH INPUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

The unit (rear)

MULTI CH

INPUT jacks

Channel output

(Center)

Device with analog

multi-channel output

(Subwoofer)

(Surround

back)

(Surround)

(Front)

1 2 3 4 5 6

Other connections

7 8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable En 48

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the

unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the

trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks.

• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.130) in the

“Setup” menu.

After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit

and then to an AC wall outlet.

AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

OUT IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

E) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

12V 0.1A

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

The unit (rear)

TRIGGER OUT

1–2 jacks

System connection

input

Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection

7 Connecting the power cable

Before connecting the power cable (General model only)

Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.

Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.

• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC

wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a

potential fire hazard.

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

RESENCE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

12V 0.1A

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

220V-

240V

110V-

120V

The unit (rear)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

OUT IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

LE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

12V 0.1A

To an AC wall outlet

The unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6

Other connections

Power cable connection

8 9

PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 49

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English,

Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and

the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired

language.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Language setting

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

PTI

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RECEIVER z

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 50

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function

detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to

your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the

speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic

parameters, to suit your room.

• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)

technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically

designed for acoustic perfection.

• Please note the following when using YPAO.

– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.

– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that

the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function

at night when it may be a nuisance to others.

– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.

– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.

– Do not connect headphones.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit.

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If

the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to

maximum.

According to your speaker configuration, configure

the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.116) in the

“Setup” menu.

For the basic speaker configuration (p.19): set to “Basic”

(default).

For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.24): set

to the appropriate setting.

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening

position (same height as your ears) and connect it

to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.

9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

VOLUME HIGH CUT

CROSSOVER/

MIN MAXMIN MAX

YPAO MIC

The unit (front)

YPAO

microphone

Ear height

Place the YPAO microphone at

your listening position (same height

as your ears). We recommend the

use of a tripod as a microphone

stand. You can use the tripod

screws to stabilize the microphone.

(The microphone direction is not

considered.)

YPAO MIC

jack

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

ENTER

REE

PTI

RECEIVER z

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 51

The following screen appears on the TV.

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting

the measurement.

If desired, select the measuring options.

a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.51) or “Angle”

(p.52) (RX-A3030 only) and press ENTER.

b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate

external devices. In this case, press SOURCE/RECEIVER (to light up the

key in orange) and then use the cursor keys.

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the

measurement.

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:

“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.55)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:

“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.53)

❑ Multi Position

Selects multi measure or single measure.

Settings

• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to

enjoy surround sound in a wider space.

• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening

position you will be seated most frequently.

Yes

Select this option if you will have several listening

positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.

You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions

in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to

suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure).

No (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always be

fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The

speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position

(single measure).

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

SOURCE/RECEIVER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 52

❑ Angle

(RX-A3030 only)

Enables/disables the angle measurement.

Settings

a b

bac

Multi measure

(5 listening positions)

Multi measure

(2 listening positions + front/back)

Multi measure

(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)

Single measure

Yes

Enables the angle measurement. The unit will measure

angle of each speaker at the listening position and

correct the speaker parameters so that CINEMA DSP

can create more effective sound fields.

No (default) Disables the angle measurement.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 53

Measuring at one listening position

(single measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for

measurement.

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the

measurement process (about 5 minutes).

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,

see “Error messages” (p.59) or “Warning messages” (p.60).

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement finishes.

(RX-A2030)

(RX-A3030 [when angle measurement is disabled])

Proceed to Step 3.

(RX-A3030 [when angle measurement is enabled])

Proceed to Step 2.

Perform the angle measurement.

a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.

Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement.

b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position and

set the YPAO microphone to the position “1”.

• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.

Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.

• Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement

finishes.

FRONT

DIRECTION

Microphone

base

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 54

c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.

The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle

measurement finishes.

d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the

positions “2” and “3”.

The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle

measurement finishes.

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.57).

To save the measurement results, use the cursor

keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 55

Measuring at multiple listening positions

(multi measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for

measurement.

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the

measurement process. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening positions.

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,

see “Error messages” (p.59) or “Warning messages” (p.60).

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement at the first position finishes.

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening

position and press ENTER.

Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions

(up to 8) have been taken.

When the measurements at the positions you want

to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to

select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.

When you have taken measurements at 8 listening

positions, the following screen appears automatically.

(RX-A2030)

(RX-A3030 [when angle measurement is disabled])

Proceed to Step 5.

(RX-A3030 [when angle measurement is enabled])

Proceed to Step 4.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 56

Perform the angle measurement.

a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER.

Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement.

b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position you

will be seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to

the position “1”.

• We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height.

Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place.

• Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement

finishes.

c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement.

The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle

measurement finishes.

d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the

positions “2” and “3”.

The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle

measurement finishes.

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.57).

To save the measurement result, use the cursor

keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

FRONT

DIRECTION

Microphone

base

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 57

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Checking the measurement results

You can check the YPAO measurement results.

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Result” and press ENTER.

• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu,

which displays the previous measurement results.

The following screen appears.

1 Measurement result items

2 Measurement result details

3 The number of measured positions (when multi

measure is performed)

Use the cursor keys to select an item.

• A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box.

To finish checking the results and return to the

previous screen, press RETURN.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

Wiring

Polarity of each speaker

Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the

correct polarity (+/-).

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the

reverse polarity (+/-).

Size

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the

subwoofer)

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level Output level adjustment for each speaker

Angle

(RX-A3030 only)

Angle of each speaker at the listening position

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 58

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not

suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings

and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto

Setup”, and then “Result” (p.112).

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and

press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

PTI

ON SCREEN

ENTER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

Cursor keys

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 59

Error messages

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the

on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select

“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

E-6: Check Sur.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround

speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen

instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again.

E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service

center.

E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact

the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

E-11: No R.PRNS SP One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 60

Warning messages

If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1: Out of Phase

A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity

(+/-).

Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.57) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by

“Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.

Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are

connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

W-2: Over Distance

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening

position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.57) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80

ft) of the listening position.

W-3: Level Error

There are significant volume differences between the

speakers.

Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the

subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as

possible.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Automatic speaker setup

PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 61

PLAYBACK

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or

BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.70)

• Playing back iPod music (p.77)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.81)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.84)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.87)

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

(p.89)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or

TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.100).

On-screen input selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and

press ENTER.

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.

Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be

used for signal output changes.

• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.62).

• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest

resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For

example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p

TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)

• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.129), you can turn on/off

each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.

Basic playback procedure

OUT 1+2

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1

and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

OUT 1

Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.

OUT 2

Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

OUT1+2

HDMIOUTSel.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

2 3

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

OGR

RETURN

P-

MEN

PTI

ENHAN

SUR

LEVE

HDMI OUT

ON SCREEN

ENTER

MUTE

VOLUME

[

]

[

]

[

]

Cursor keys

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 62

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.

You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.

Press SCENE.

The input source and settings registered to the

corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on

automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.

Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes

from the “Scene” menu (p.106).

On-screen scene selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press

ENTER.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

SCENE (SCENE key) 1 (BD/DVD) 2 (TV) 3 (NET) 4 (RADIO)

Input

Input (p.61) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER

Audio Select (p.102) Auto Auto — —

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.61) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2

Mode

Sound Program (p.64) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 9ch Stereo 9ch Stereo

Pure Direct Mode (p.121) Auto Auto Auto Auto

Enhancer (p.69) Off On On On

Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.102) On On On On

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

PTI

ON SCREEN

ENTER

SCENE

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 63

Configuring scene assignments

Set the unit to the condition (such as input source

and sound program) that you want to assign to a

scene.

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET

Complete” appears on the front display.

If you want to control the corresponding playback

device after selecting the scene, hold down the

corresponding SCENE key and input selection key

together for more than 3 seconds.

Once the setting is completed successfully, “OK” appears in the

display window on the remote control.

• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see

“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.139) to register it.

• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external

device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify

the device type in “Device Control” (p.107) in the “Scene” menu.

Selecting setting items to be included as

scene assignments

In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output

and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the

scene assignments in “Detail” (p.108) in the “Scene” menu.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SETComplete

SCENE1

Sound Tone Control, Adaptive DRC

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue

Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround

Video Video Mode, Video Adjustment

Vol ume Master Volume

Lipsync Lipsync, Delay

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

ENTER

REE

PTI

SCENE

[

]

[

]

[

]

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 64

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and

surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with

your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo

playback).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies

• MOVIE THEATER category (p.66):

Press MOVIE repeatedly.

• ENTERTAINMENT category (p.66):

Press ENTERTAIN repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing

video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games.

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or

stereo playback

• CLASSICAL category (p.67):

Press CLASSICAL repeatedly.

• LIVE/CLUB category (p.67):

Press LIVE/CLUB repeatedly.

• STEREO category (p.67):

Press STEREO repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening

music sources or stereo playback.

❑ Selecting a surround decoder

• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from

2-channel sources (p.68).

❑ Switching to the straight decode mode

• Press STRAIGHT.

• This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original

channels (p.68).

❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode

•Press PURE DIRECT.

This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the

electrical noise from other circuitry (p.69).

❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer

• Press ENHANCER.

This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth

and breadth (p.69).

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press

ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround

decoder and press ENTER.

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing

PROGRAM.

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in

the “Sound Program” menu (p.109).

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the

speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.12) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in

the “Information” menu (p.133).

Selecting the sound mode

2 3

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

HDMI

MEM

INF

LEVE

SOU

EIVE

UDI

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

INPU

MUTE

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

PTI

SUR.DECODE

ENHANCER

CLASSICAL

LIVE/CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO

STRAIGHT

PURE DIRECT

ON SCREEN

ENTER

PROGRAM

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 65

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields

(CINEMA DSP HD/CINEMA DSP 3D)

* CINEMA DSP HD³: RX-A3030, CINEMA DSP 3D: RX-A2030

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize

Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA

DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual

movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural

stereoscopic sound fields.

• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.100) in

the “Option” menu to “Off”.

• The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and

surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front

presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend using front presence

speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear

presence speakers for further spatial sounds).

• (RX-A3030 only)

The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and

surround speakers to produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front

presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without

surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and

9ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit

utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce

up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the

well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We

recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more

effective stereoscopic sound field.

■ Enjoying surround sound with

headphones (SILENT CINEMA)

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel

speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the

headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program

or a surround decoder.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

HallinVienna

CLASSICAL

MUSIC

“CINEMA DSP !” (RX-A3030) or “CINEMA DSP n” (RX-A2030) lights up

Sound program category

Sound program

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 66

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as

movies, TV programs, and games.

❑ MOVIE THEATER

❑ ENTERTAINMENT

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling

without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,

such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the

ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful

reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie

productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the

cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing

everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the

latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of

cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear

separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and

adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but

puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,

powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth

creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation

of the sounds and the separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of

movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects

and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not

impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for

long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,

in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a

pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate

reverberation to the original audio.

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts

and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’

voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the

stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of

the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting

games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player

feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater

concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This

program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction

of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of

scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as

if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere

thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence

sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround

sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and

emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the

reverberations of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as

providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage.

The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall

effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will

not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 67

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback

(MUSIC)

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.

You can also select stereo playback.

❑ CLASSICAL

❑ LIVE/CLUB

❑ STEREO

• CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D (p.65) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.65) do not work when “2ch

Stereo” or “9ch Stereo” is selected.

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500

seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s

virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a

shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,

producing a very full, rich sound.

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.

Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a

pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the

high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial

reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself

reproduces the atmosphere of the church.

Church in

Royaumont

This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall)

of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the

outskirts of Paris.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an

audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable

for courtly music and chamber music.

Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low

ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in

the center.

Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the

concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and

homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds

that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small

stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert

venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the

hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a

famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left

and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When

multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and

output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

9ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back

multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and

then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 68

Enjoying unprocessed playback

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect

processing.

■ Playing back in original channels

(straight decode)

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces

stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as

CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for

multichannel sources.

Press STRAIGHT.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is

enabled or disabled.

• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround

back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.101) in the “Option” menu to

a setting other than “Off”.

■ Playing back 2-channel sources in

multichannel (surround decoder)

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel

playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is

input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.

For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.156).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder

changes.

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are

connected or when “Surround Back” (p.117) in the “Setup” menu is set to

“None”.

VOLUME

SBL SBR

SW1

SL SR

CL R

STRAIGHT

bPro Logic

Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all

sources.

bPLIIx Movie

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.

bPLII Movie

bPLIIx Music

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for music.

bPLII Music

bPLIIx Game

Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for games.

bPLII Game

Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.

Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ProLogic

SUR.DECODE

2 3

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENHAN

HDMI

MEM

INF

LEVE

SOU

EIVE

UDI

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

INPU

PUR

IRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

ENTER

REE

PTI

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 69

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the

selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the

electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It

allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

Press PURE DIRECT.

Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is

enabled or disabled.

• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.

– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs

– Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus

– Using the multi-zone function

– Output from the AV OUT jacks

– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced

sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the

sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original

sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along

with any other sound modes.

In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of

uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC)

when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.102) in the “Option” menu is set to “On”

(default).

Press ENHANCER.

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer

is enabled or disabled.

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling

rate is over 48 kHz.

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.102) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable

Compressed Music Enhancer.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

PUREDIRECT

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

EnhancerOn

“ENHANCER” lights up

2 3

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SUR

HDMI

MEM

INF

LEVE

SOU

EIVE

UDI

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

ENTER

REE

PTI

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 70

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or

selecting from registered radio stations.

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is

being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used

in U.K. and Europe models.

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM

antennas.

Setting the frequency steps

(Asia and General models only)

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and

9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the

frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.

Set the unit to standby mode.

When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,

press MAIN ZONE z.

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ

STEP”.

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby

mode and turn it on again.

Selecting a frequency for reception

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press FM or AM to select a band.

Use the following keys to set a frequency.

TUN./CH: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the

key for about a second to search stations automatically.

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to

select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio

station.

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of

reception range.

• (U.S.A. model only)

You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio

reception in “Audio Mode” (p.103) in the “Option” menu. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may

improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the

monaural reception mode.)

• (Except for U.S.A. model)

You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM

radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.103) in the “Option” menu. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may

improve it.

Listening to FM/AM radio

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

OUT

ZONE

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM50/AM9

TUNERFRQSTEP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CLR

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM87.50MHz

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM98.50MHz

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

UDI

V-

MUL

[

]

[

]

[

]

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

ENTER

REE

PTI

ENHAN

SUR

HDMI

LEVE

TUN./CH

TUNER

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 71

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their

preset numbers.

• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD

Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.74, p.76).

■ Registering a radio station

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.70)

to tune into the desired radio station.

• (U.S.A. model only)

To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.72)

after tuning into the radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected

radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.

Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered

to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most

recently registered number.

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning

into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a

preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

■ Selecting a preset station

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio

station.

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by

using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.74, p.76).

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

PresetOK

01:FM98.50MHz

Preset

Preset number

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM98.50MHz

02:Empty

Preset

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

01:FM98.50MHz

Preset

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

NHAN

SUR

HDMI

LEVE

SOU

EIVE

UDI

MUL

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

IRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

ENTER

REE

PTI

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNER

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 72

HD Radio™ tuning

(U.S.A. model only)

HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM

radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting

provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and

reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental

program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio

programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further

information on HD Radio Technology, visit

“http://www.ibiquity.com/”.

The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating

CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM

broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data

(such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types)

from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).

When tuning into an HD Radio station

• The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If

you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down

TUN./CH, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys.

• When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.103), you can tune into the

analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only.

■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program

You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD

Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8).

Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio

program.

You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8)

directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select

program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it).

■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information

You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display.

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the item switches.

About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed.

• Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station

or period of time.



Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience

of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs,

HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams.



Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels.

These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as

deep cuts into traditional genre.



Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio

stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s

FM and FM sounds like a CD.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

WXYZ-FM

FM88.9MHz1

HD1/3

Relative/total program number

(when multiple programs are available)

“HD” lights up Absolute program number

(when multiple programs are available)

Station Info Frequency, station name (call sign)

Category Station name (call sign), program category

Artist/Song Station name (call sign), artist name/song title

Album Station name (call sign), album title

DSP Program Frequency, sound program selected on the unit

Audio Decoder Frequency, decoder selected on the unit

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

WXYZ-FM

FM88.9MHz3

HD2/3

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Category

Info

Item name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

RhythmandBlu

WXYZ-FM

FM88.9-1

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

NHAN

SUR

HDMI

MEM

LEVE

SOU

EIVE

UDI

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

IRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

ENTER

REE

PTI

ENT

TUN./CH

INFO

MODE

Numeric keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 73

■ Holding HD Radio™ information display

You can hold the HD Radio information currently displayed on the

TV (playback screen) and front display by using the hold function.

When the desired HD Radio information is

displayed, press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Hold/Unhold”

(Hold/Unhold) and press ENTER.

The current information will remain displayed until

“Hold/Unhold” is selected again.

• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.

• The hold function is automatically disabled if the unit is set to standby mode

or if another input source or another radio station is selected.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

■ HD Radio™ operation on the TV

You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on

the TV.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

❑ Playback screen

1 HOLD indicator

Flashes when the hold function (p.73) is enabled.

2 Radio station information

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program

number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program

category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 HD indicator

Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received.

4 TUNED/STEREO indicators

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

Menu Submenu Function

Manual Tuning

Switches to FM/AM.

Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.

Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.

Program (+/-)

Selects an audio program (when

multiple audio programs are

available).

Memory

Registers the selected station as

presets.

Direct Enters a frequency directly.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset

station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

TUNER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 74

■ Browse screen

1 Preset station list

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1

(HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program,

Radio Data System tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM

stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of

Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program

Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio

Data System broadcasting station.

■

Displaying the Radio Data System information

Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System

broadcasting stations (p.76).

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

Menu Submenu Function

Utility

Memory

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers HD Radio

(FM/AM) stations and FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

1 Page Down

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Program Service Program service name

Program Type Current program type

Radio Text Information on the current program

Clock Time Current time

DSP Program Sound mode name

Audio Decoder Decoder name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ProgramType

Info

Item name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

CLASSICS

FM98.50MHz

Information

Frequency (always displayed)

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

2 3

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

UDI

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

REE

PTI

ENHAN

SUR

HDMI

LEVE

INFO

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 75

• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not

displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System

service.

■ Receiving traffic information

automatically

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit

automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,

follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”

(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.

The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.

Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.

• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor

keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the

search finishes.

• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information

stations are found.

Operating the radio on the TV

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the

TV.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

■ Playback screen

1 Radio station information

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

(U.K. and Europe models only)

When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.74), the

Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”

“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.

2 Band icon

(Except for U.K. and Europe models)

Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.

3 TUNED/STEREO indicators

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

4 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

TPFM101.30MHz

TrafficProgram

Finished

Traffic information station (frequency)

• (U.S.A. model only)

See “HD Radio™ operation on the TV” (p.73) to operate the radio on the TV.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

TUNER

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 76

■ Browse screen

1 Preset station list

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• (U.K. and Europe models only)

Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto

Preset”.

Menu Submenu Function

Manual Tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Switches to FM/AM.

Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency.

Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically.

Memory

Registers the selected station as

presets.

Direct Enters a frequency directly.

Browse

Moves to the browse screen (preset

station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Utility

Memory

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

1 Page Down

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 77

You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable

supplied with the iPod.

• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,

depending on the model or software version of the iPod.

• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)

is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite

AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack on the front panel. To

select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.79).

Connecting an iPod

Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the

iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby

mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If

“Network Standby” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to

charge without limit.

• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

Playing back iPod music

Made for.

iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation)

iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th 5th and 6th generation)

iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone

iPad (3rd generation), iPad2, iPad

(as of June 2013)

ENTER

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

PROGRAM

SILEN

5V 2.1A

The unit (front)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Connected

USB

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 78

Playback of iPod content

Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start

playback.

You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the

simple play mode (p.79).

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.80) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

RETURN

USB

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 79

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.80) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to

control playback.

■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control

(simple play)

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.

The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are

enabled.

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to

start playback.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding

down).

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

Operational remote control

keys

Function

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms the selection.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

External device

operation keys

Starts playback or stops playback

temporarily.

s Stops playback.

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (by holding

down).

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

MODE

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 80

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.

• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or

press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs (Songs)

Plays back songs in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Albums

(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly.

“v” appears in the TV screen.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

MODE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 81

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on

the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage

device for more information.

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or

FAT32 format).

• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC

files (1- or 2-channel audio only).

• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC

files, and 48 kHz for other files.

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer

of the USB storage device.

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

• The unit does not support a USB hub.

Connecting a USB storage device

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In

this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.

• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.

• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.

• You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit.

• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use

extension cables.

Playback of USB storage device contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device

contents and start playback.

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed

on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

displayed.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

ENTER

DISPLAYRETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

PROGRAM

SILEN

5V 2.1A

The unit (front)

USB storage device

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Connected

USB

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

ENTER

REE

PTI

USB

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 82

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.83) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys

(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 83

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.83) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB

storage device contents.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 84

You can play back music files stored on your PC or

DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router

(p.46). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)

are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.134) in the “Information” menu.

• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC

and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only).

• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC

files, and 48 kHz for other files.

• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing

of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

Media sharing setup

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible

NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each

music server.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player

installed

Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is

installed on your PC.

In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing

and allow media to be shared with the device.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server

software installed

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and

configure the media sharing settings.

Playback of PC music contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and

start playback.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV

screen.

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the

playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and

press ENTER.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

NET

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 85

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.86) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q /w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 86

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.86) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.106).

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC

music content.

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 87

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.46). You can

check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly

assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.134) in the “Information” menu.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and

the playback screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

Listening to Internet radio

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

RETURN

NET

Cursor keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 88

■ Browse screen

1 Playback indicator

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to

select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by

selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the

following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need

the unit’s vTuner ID and your e-mail address in order to create your personal

account. You can find the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.134)

in the “Information” menu.

http://yradio.vtuner.com/

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to

stop playback.

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control s Stops playback.

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu

operation keys to redisplay it.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 89

The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on

the unit via network.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same

router (p.46). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP

address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.134) in the “Information”

menu.

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music

contents on the unit.

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or

display the playback screen on the iPod.

If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon

( ) appears.

• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are

connected to the router properly.

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and

select the unit (network name of the unit) as the

audio output device.

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and

starts playback.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac

with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.

(as of June 2013)

iTunes

Router

Playback starts

iPod

Starts playback

on iTunes

or iPod

The unit

iTunes (example) iPod (example)

Network name of the unit

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 90

• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by

setting “Network Standby” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on

iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu.

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the

iTunes/iPod stops automatically.

• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable

volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.105) in the “Input”

menu to “Off”.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to

configure the iTu nes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers

in advance.

Caution

• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be

unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the

volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod

immediately.

Menu Submenu Function

Play Control

a Resumes playback from pause.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Skips forward/backward.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation

keys to redisplay it.

iTunes (example of English version)

Check this box

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 91

The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input

sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in

other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4).

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main

zone), another person can listen to PC music in the study room

(Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room (Zone3)

and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4).

Multi-zone configuration examples

■ Enjoying music in other rooms

You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms.

Connections

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.32

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.92

■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms

You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms.

❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers

Connections

TV (for analog video playback): p.93

TV (for digital video playback): p.94

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.32

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.92

❑

Enjoying videos/music using only a TV

Connection

TV: p.94

Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how

you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see

“Multi-zone output” (p.160).

• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone

configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best

meet your requirements.

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2 and/or Zone3)

Audio

(SPEAKERS or

ZONE OUT)

Living room (main zone)

Guest room

(Zone2 or Zone3)

Audio

(SPEAKERS or

ZONE OUT)

Video (ZONE

OUT or HDMI)

Living room (main zone)

Kitchen

(Zone2 or Zone4)

Video/audio

(HDMI)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 92

Preparing the multi zone system

Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit.

■ Connecting speakers to play back audio

Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2 or Zone3. The

connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used

(the unit or an external amplifier).

❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with

speaker cables. For details, see “Connecting Zone2/3 speakers”

(p.32).

❑ Using an external amplifier

Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit

with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external

amplifier.

• (RX-A3030 only)

You cannot use an external amplifier for Zone2 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

jacks are set to output front presence channel audio in “Power Amp Assign”

(p.116) in the “Setup” menu. Also, you cannot use an external amplifier for Zone3

when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are configured to output rear presence

channel audio.

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting

speakers or an external amplifier.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or

come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit

or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will

appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

DMI OUT

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AUDI O 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDI O 3

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTE

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (

(

EXTRA SP2

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

AUDIO

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT

(ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks

Zone2 or Zone3

Main zone

External amplifier

Audio input

(analog stereo)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 93

■ Connecting a video monitor to play back

analog videos

Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2 or

Zone3. Depending on the video input jacks available on your video

monitor, choose one of the video connection methods.

• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for

multi-zone video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the

zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same

way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the

DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component

video cable.

• On-screen operations are not available for Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign”

(p.129) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”.

To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the video monitor

for Zone2 or Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.128) in the “Setup”

menu to “Zone2” or “Zone3”.

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP2

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT jacks

(any of COMPONENT VIDEO,

VIDEO, S VIDEO)

Zone2 or Zone3

Main zone

Video input

(any of component video,

composite video, S-video)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 94

■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to

play back videos/audio

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back

videos/audio at Zone2 or Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you

can enjoy multi-channel playback in another room (Zone4).

• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to

connect the video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.41).

• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected

to the unit.

• On-screen operations are not available for Zone4.

To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set

“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”.

• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can

enable/disable the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio

Output” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).

• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.32).

TWORK

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2

YPB PR YPB

AV 1

AV 3

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4

OPTICAL

XIAL

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDI O 3AUDI O 2AUDI O 1

(2 TV)

CENTE

SUBWOOF

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SURROUND BAC

SURROUND

COAXIAL

R L

NTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

HDMI

OUT

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack

Zone4

Main zone

HDMI input

(Example: using a TV)

HDMI input

(Example: using an AV amplifier)

Zone2 or Zone4

• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the

following operations is performed.

– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input

– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source

– Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”)

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 95

■ Operating the unit from another room

(remote connection)

You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3

or Zone4 using the supplied remote control if you connect an

infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT 1 or

REMOTE IN/OUT 2 jacks.

• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a

remote control code for each device before using (p.138).

Remote connections between Yamaha products

An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using

Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit

does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an

infrared signal receiver.

HDMI

AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRI

YPB PR

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

AV 3

REMOTE

PONENT VIDEO

AV 4

LTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

OUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACK

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP2

12V

IN OUT

REMOTE

The unit (rear)

REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks

External device

(such as a CD player)

Remote control

Infrared

signal

receiver

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Main zone

Infrared signal

transmitter

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Yamaha products

(up to six, including the unit)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 96

Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Press ZONE repeatedly to select a zone.

Each time you press the key, the zone to be operated

switches.

Press RECEIVER z.

Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled

or disabled.

When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding

zone indicator lights up in the front display.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

• Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how

you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details,

see “Multi-zone output” (p.160).

• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For

example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the

main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.70)

• Playing back iPod music (p.77)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.81)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.84)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.87)

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

(p.89)

• You can also use the web control to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4. For

details on the web control function, refer to “Supplement for Web Control” on

the CD-ROM.

• AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is

ongoing in the main zone.

RECEIVER

Selected zone (turns off when main zone is selected)

Caution

• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or

Zone4.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

2 3

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

ENTER

REE

PTI

ENHAN

SUR

HDMI

LEVE

ZONE

[

]

[

]

[

]

RECEIVER z RECEIVER z

Input selection keys

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 97

■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or

Zone4

The following functions are also available when the zone you want

to operate is enabled.

Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)

Press VOLUME or MUTE.

Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)

Press SCENE.

• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,

hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front

display. (Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.)

Setting the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30

min, off).

Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds

(for Zone2 and Zone3 only)

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be

operated.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

Adjusting the front speaker balance (for Zone2 and Zone3 only)

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be

operated.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple

rooms (party mode)

The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same

music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party

mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones.

Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as

background music for a house party.

Press PARTY.

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or

off.

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the

front display.

• You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode

Set” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu.

• Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main

zone.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

2 3

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

UDI

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

OGR

RETURN

P-

MEN

ENTER

REE

PTI

ENHAN

SUR

HDMI

LEVE

SLEEP

PARTY

MUTE

VOLUME

SCENE

PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 98

Switching information on the front display

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed

item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio

decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

Viewing the status information on the TV

Press DISPLAY.

The following information is displayed on the TV.

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

Viewing the current status

Input source group Item

AV 1–7

V-AUX

AUDIO 1–4

PHONO

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

TUNER

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

* (U.S.A. model only)

HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned

into an HD Radio station (p.72).

* (U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is

tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.74).

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

AudioDecoder

Info

Item name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ProLogic

AV1

Information

USB

SERVER

AirPlay

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album

name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name*)

* During simple playback of iPod:

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station

(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

Input source group Item

Input source/

Party mode

status

Audio format/

Decoder

Compressed Music Enhancer/Hi-Res mode status

CINEMA DSP status

Sound

mode

Volume

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

2 3

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

UDI

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

ENTER

REE

PTI

ENHAN

SUR

HDMI

LEVE

INFO

DISPLAY

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 99

You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This

menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily

configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

Front display

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Option menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ToneControl

Option

Item Function Page

Tone Control

(Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency

range of sounds.

100

Adaptive DRC

(Adaptive DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to

minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume

is adjusted.

100

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

(CINEMA DSP 3D)

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 100

Dialogue Adjust

(Dialog Adjust)

Dialogue Level

(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 101

Dialogue Lift

(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 101

Extended Surround

(EXTD Surround)

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources

when surround back speakers are used.

101

Volume Trim

(Volume Trim)

Input Trim

(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. 101

Subwoofer

Trim (SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 102

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 102

Hi-Res Mode

(HiRes Mode)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for

enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital

audio).

102

Video Mode

(Video Mode)

Enables/disables the video signal processing

settings configured in the “Setup” menu.

102

Video Adjustment

(Video Adjust)

Selects a video adjustment setting from presets. 102

Audio Select

(Audio Select)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than

one audio connection is made for one input source.

102

Audio Mode

(Audio Mode)

(U.S.A. model only)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM

radio reception.

103

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 100

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.

Choices

Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Setting range

-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments

Default

Bypass (Bypass)

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

Adjusting with the front panel controls

a Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted

when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to

playback at a low volume at night.

Settings

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a

high volume.

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD³ (RX-A3030) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-A2030)

(p.65). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D functions with

the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo).

Settings

FM Mode

(FM Mode)

(Except for U.S.A. model)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio

reception.

103

Hold/Unhold

(Hold/Unhold)

(U.S.A. model only)

Enables/disables the hold function when the unit is

tuned into an HD Radio station.

Traffic Program

(TrafficProgram)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Automatically searches for a traffic information

station.

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.80),

USB storage device (p.83), or media server (p.86).

—

Repeat

(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.80),

USB storage device (p.83), or media server (p.86).

—

Item Function Page

On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.

Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D.

Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D.

Volume: low Volume: high

Input level Input level

Off

Output level

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 101

■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you

can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

Setting range

0 to 3

Default

❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is

coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this

setting.

• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.

– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) is selected when front presence

speakers are used.

– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.65) is working.

(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

Setting range

0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

Default

■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers

are used.

Settings

• Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround

back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing

back those sources.

■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)

Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.

❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume

differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

Ideal position

Auto (Auto)

(default)

Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain

surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals

in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,

the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.

bPLIIx Movie

(bPLIIxMo)

Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic

IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround

back speakers are connected.

bPLIIx Music

(bPLIIxMu)

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro

Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two

surround back speakers are connected.

EX/ES (EX/ES)

Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and

reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.

Off (Off)

Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when

DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit

reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.)

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 102

❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.

❑ Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.69).

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer

(p.69).

Settings

Default

TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)

Others: Off (Off)

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.

❑ Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this

function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio

(such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.

Settings

■ Video Mode (Video Mode)

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video

adjustments) settings configured in “Processing” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu.

Settings

■ Video Adjustment (Video Adjust)

Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment”

(p.123) in the “Setup” menu.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings

1 to 6

■ Audio Select (Audio Select)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for

one input source.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings

Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode.

On (On) (default) Enables the high-resolution mode.

Processing

(Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

Direct (Direct)

(default)

Disables the video signal processing.

Auto (Auto) (default)

Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.

1. HDMI input

2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)

3. Analog input (AUDIO)

HDMI (HDMI)

Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals

are input through the HDMI jack.

Coax/Opt

(Coax/Opt)

Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are

produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or

OPTICAL jack.

Analog (Analog)

Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when

no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 103

■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode)

(U.S.A. model only)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception.

• This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM).

Settings

• HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)

(Except for U.S.A. model)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.

Settings

Auto (Auto) (default)

Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the

signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good.

Mono (Mono) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds.

Stereo (Stereo)

(default)

Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 104

CONFIGURATIONS

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured

and press the cursor key (q).

The input source of the unit also changes.

• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Input menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

Item Function Page

Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 105

Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 105

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via

AirPlay.

105

Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 105

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media

Controller (DMC) to control playback.

106

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 105

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).

• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.

For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder

Mode” to “DTS”.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)

Settings

■ Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

Input sources

AirPlay

Settings

■ Video Out

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

Input sources

TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH

Settings

Default

USB: V-AUX

Others: Off

Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Limited (default)

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range

(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to

+16.5 dB and mute).

Off Does not output video.

AV 1–7, V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 106

■ DMC Control

Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback.

Input source

SERVER

Settings

• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.

When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media

Player 12) on the same network.

You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.62) using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and

press the cursor key (q).

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback.

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 107

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

■ Save

Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the

selected scene.

• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device

assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.63).

■ Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.

Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene

assignments.

❑ Device Control

Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to

the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)

Settings

Default

SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control

SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off

• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI

Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.161).

Item Function Page

Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 107

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can

also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items

to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings

currently assigned to the selected scene.

107

Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 108

Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 108

Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this

if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is

connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports

HDMI Control.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 108

❑ Detail

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings

currently assigned to the selected scene.

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and

press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).

For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with

low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and

include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).

Choices

Default

Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected

Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Reset

Restores the default settings (p.62) for the selected scene.

Input Input (p.61), Audio Select (p.102)

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.61)

Mode

Sound Program (p.64), Pure Direct Mode (p.121), Enhancer (p.69),

Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.102)

Sound Tone Control (p.100), Adaptive DRC (p.100)

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.100), Dialogue Lift (p.101), Dialogue Level

(p.101), Subwoofer Trim (p.102), Extended Surround (p.101)

Video Video Mode (p.122), Video Adjustment (p.102)

Volume Master Volume (p.61)

Lipsync Lipsync (p.120), Delay (p.120)

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.116), PEQ Select (p.119)

Check or uncheck

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 109

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the

TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be

configured and press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring sound programs/surround

decoders (Sound Program menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 110

Sound Program menu items

• Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround

decoder.

■ Settings for sound programs

Item Function Settings

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be used

in combination with the selected sound

program.

bPro Logic*,

bPLIIx Movie (bPLII

Movie),

bPLIIx Music* (bPLII

Music*),

bPLIIx Game* (bPLII

Game*),

Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music*

(* Available only when

“SURROUND DECODER” is

selected)

DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.

-6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB)

Higher to enhance the sound

field effect, and lower to

reduce it.

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and presence sound field

generation.

1 ms to 99 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround sound field

generation.

1 ms to 49 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Back Initial

Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround back sound field

generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

presence sound field.

0.1 to 2.0

Higher to enhance the

broadening effect, and lower

to reduce it.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround sound field.

Surround Back Room

Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround back sound field.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound

field.

0 to 10

Higher to enhance the

reflectivity, and lower to

reduce it.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound

field.

Surround Back

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround back

sound field.

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear

reverberant sound.

1.0 s to 5.0 s

Higher to enrich the

reverberant sound and lower

to have clear sound.

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and reverberant sound

generation.

0ms to 250ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant

sound.

0% to 100%

Higher to strengthen the

reverberant sound, and lower

to weaken it.

Item Function Settings

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 111

The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo”.

• Available items in “9ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

■ Settings for decoders

The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND

DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.

Sound program

Item Function Settings

2ch Stereo Direct

Selects whether to

automatically bypass the

DSP circuit when an

analog audio source is

played back.

Auto (default), Off

9ch Stereo

Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0)

Front / Rear Balance

Adjusts the front and rear

volume balance.

-5 to +5 (default: 0)

Higher to enhance the front

side, and lower to enhance

the rear side.

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the right and left

volume balance.

-5 to +5 (default: 0)

Higher to enhance the right

side, and lower to enhance

the left side.

Height Balance

Adjust the height volume

balance using the front

presence speakers.

0 to 10 (default: 5)

Higher to enhance the

upside, and lower to

enhance the downside. (The

front presence speakers do

not produce sounds when

“Height Balance” is set to

“0”.)

Monaural Mix

Enables/disables

monaural sound output.

Off (default), On

Decode Type Item Function Settings

bPLIIx Music

(bPLII Music)

Panorama

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the front sound

field.

Off (default), On

Select “On” to wrap front right/left

channel sounds around the field

and generate a spacious sound

field in combination with the

surround sound field.

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the center

sound field.

0 to 7 (default: 3)

Higher to enhance the broadening

effect, and lower to reduce it

(closer to center).

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in

level between the front

and surround sound

fields.

-3 to +3 (default: 0)

Higher to strengthen the front

sound field and lower to strengthen

the surround sound field.

Neo:6 Music Center Image

Adjusts the center

orientation level

(broadening effect) of

the front sound field.

0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3)

Higher to strengthen the center

orientation level (less broadening

effect) and lower to weaken (more

broadening effect).

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 112

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 113

Setup menu items

Menu Item Function Page

Speaker

Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 50

Manual Setup

Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 116

Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 116

Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 116

Configuration

Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 117

Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 117

Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 117

Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 117

Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. 118

Rear Presence Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected. 118

Subwoofer 1

Subwoofer 2

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase. 118

SWFR Layout Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used. 118

Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 118

Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 118

Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 119

Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 119

Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 119

Sound

Lipsync

Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 120

Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 120

Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 120

Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 120

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 120

Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 121

Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 121

Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 121

VPS

(RX-A3030 only)

Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers. 121

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 114

Video

Analog to Analog Conversion Enables/disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks 122

Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments). 122

HDMI

HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 124

Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 124

Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 125

Network

IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 125

Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 126

MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 126

Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 126

Multi Zone

Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 127

Zone2 Set

Zone3 Set

Vol ume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 127

Max Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 127

Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 127

Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 128

Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 128

Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 128

Zone4 Set

Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 128

Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 128

Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 128

HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 129

Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone. 129

Function

Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 129

Display Set

Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 130

Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 130

Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 130

Trigger Output1

Trigger Output2

Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 130

Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 131

DC OUT Power Mode Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 131

Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 131

Menu Item Function Page

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 115

ECO

Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 132

ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 132

Language Select an on-screen menu language. 132

Menu Item Function Page

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 116

Speaker (Manual Setup)

Configures the speaker settings manually.

■ Setting Pattern

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in

the selected pattern.

• Measurement results (Auto Setup)

• Power Amp Assign

• Configuration

• Distance

• Level

• Parametric EQ

Settings

Pattern1 (default), Pattern2

• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Auto Setup” and “Manual Setup” screens.

• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your

listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,

you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.

■ Setting Data Copy

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

Choices

■ Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.

The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to

2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power

amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.

Settings

Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.

Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.

Basic (default)

Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to

9-channel plus rear presence speakers) (p.19).

7ch +1ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone and

Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers (p.30).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks

(default: Zone2).

9ch +1ZONE

Select this when you use 9-channel speakers in the main zone and

Zone3 (or Zone2) speakers (p.30).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks

(default: Zone3).

7ch +2ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone, plus

Zone2 and Zone3 speakers (p.31).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks

(default: Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3).

9ch +RP

(RX-A3030 only)

Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus rear presence

channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.27).

9ch +FRONT

(RX-A3030 only)

Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus front channel

expansion using an external amplifier (p.28).

7ch +FP+RP

(RX-A3030 only)

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers, plus front presence and

rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.28).

7ch

+FRONT+1ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers plus front channel

expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone and Zone3 (or

Zone2) speakers (p.29).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks

(default: Zone3).

5ch

+FRONT+2ZONE

Select this when you use 5-channel speakers plus front channel

expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone, plus Zone2

and Zone3 speakers (p.29).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks

(default: Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3).

7ch BI-AMP

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front

speakers) (p.26).

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 117

■ Configuration

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm

(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).

❑ Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Settings

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

❑ Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Settings

❑ Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

❑ Surround Back

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.

7ch BI-AMP

+1ZONE

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front

speakers) in the main zone and Zone3 (or Zone2) speakers (p.26).

You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks

(default: Zone3).

7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP

(RX-A3030 only)

Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front

speakers), plus front presence and rear presence channel expansion

using an external amplifier (p.27).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components

lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency

components.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel

frequency components.

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual

CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.

The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Large x2

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Small x2 (default)

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 118

❑ Front Presence

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.

Settings

❑ Rear Presence

Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”.

❑ Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or

SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase.

Settings

• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

❑ SWFR Layout

Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”.

❑ Extra Bass

Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Settings

• This setting is not available when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”, or when “Front”

is set to “Small”.

■ Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the

speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance

from “Meter” or “Feet”.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,

Subwoofer 2

Setting range

0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

Default

3.00 m (10.0 ft)

Use (default) Select this option when front presence speakers are connected.

None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.

Use Select this option when rear presence speakers are connected.

None (default) Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected.

Use

Normal

(default)

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the

SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The

subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and

low-frequency components from other channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the

SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The

subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and

low-frequency components from other channels.

None

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the

SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will

produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency

components from other channels when both “Subwoofer 1” and

“Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”.

Left + Right

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right

sides of the room.

Front + Rear

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear

sides of the room.

Monaural x2

(default)

Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely.

Off (default)

Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or

front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.

Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel

low-frequency components.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 119

■ Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1,

Subwoofer 2

Setting range

-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

Adjusting while viewing the front display

a Press LEVEL.

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a speaker.

c Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the volume of the selected speaker.

■ Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

Settings

• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto

Setup” have already been saved (p.50). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.

Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.

Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.

• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.50) to the “Manual” fields for

fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands

(4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER

repeatedly to select an item.

Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected

band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and

the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)

Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Settings

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as

the front speakers.

YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through Does not use the equalizer.

Off (default) Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance

or equalizer.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 120

Sound

Configures the audio output settings.

■ Lipsync

Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.

❑ Delay Enable

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

Choices

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4

Settings

❑ Auto/Manual Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Setting range

• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV

connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.

❑ Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual

Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when

“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.

Setting range

0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

Default

0 ms

• When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment

and fine adjustment.

■ Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and

DTS signals) playback.

Settings

■ Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Default

+16.5 dB

Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Enable (default) Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Auto (default)

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when

a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the

unit via HDMI.

If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in

“Adjustment”.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video

and audio output manually.

Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Minimum/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low

volumes.

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is

automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 121

■ Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.

Settings

■ Pure Direct Mode

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.69).

Settings

■ Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

Settings

■ VPS

(RX-A3030 only)

Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and

surround speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front

presence speakers are connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence

speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.65).

Settings

• Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set

“VPS” to “Off”.

Off (default)

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered

standby mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5

dB increments).

(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

Auto (default)

Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from

the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with

the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input,

the wall paper is displayed.

Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.

Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

On (default)

Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO

measurement results and the volume level.

Off Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

On (default) Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS).

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 122

Video

Configures the video output settings.

■ Analog to Analog Conversion

Enables/disables the video conversion (p.159) between the analog video jacks

(COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO).

Settings

• This function works only when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.128) is set to “Main” (default) and “HDMI OUT2

Assign” (p.129) is set to “Main” (default) or “Zone4”.

• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

• Only 480i/576i-resolution video signals can be output from the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks (p.159).

■ Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video

adjustments).

Settings

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to

reduce video output delay.

❑ Resolution

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.136) in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on

your TV normally.)

❑ Aspect

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or

2160p (4K) signals.

Off Disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.

On (default)

Enables the video conversion between the analog video jacks.

Converted video signals are output from the MONITOR OUT jacks

only.

Direct (default) Disables the video signal processing.

Processing

Enables the video signal processing.

Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”.

Through Does not convert the resolution.

Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,

1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.

(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side

of the screen.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 123

❑ Adjustment

Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Detail Enhancement

Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details.

Setting range

0 to 50

Default

Edge Enhancement

Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges.

Setting range

0 to 50

Default

Brightness

Adjusts the video brightness.

Setting range

-100 to +100

Default

Contrast

Adjusts the video contrast.

Setting range

-100 to +100

Default

Saturation

Adjusts the video saturation.

Setting range

-100 to +100

Default

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 124

HDMI

Configures the HDMI settings.

■ HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.161).

Settings

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.161) after connecting HDMI

Control-compatible devices.

❑ TV Audio Input

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI

Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when

the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

Settings

AUDIO 1–4

Default

AUDIO 1

• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting

an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

❑ ARC

Enables/disables ARC (p.35) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected

to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to

“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.

❑ Standby Sync

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit

when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

■ Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) is set to “Main”.

❑ Amp

Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to

the unit.

Settings

Off (default) Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.

Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby

Sync”.

Off Disables ARC.

On (default) Enables ARC.

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto (default)

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the

unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 125

❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or

HDMI OUT 2 jack.

Settings

• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.

■ Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the

unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection

keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby

mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Settings

• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

Network

Configures the network settings.

■ IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

❑ DHCP

Select whether to use a DHCP server.

Settings

■ Manual network settings

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to

select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.

Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV.

On Enables the audio output from the TV.

Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters

manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

On (default)

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network

parameters (such as IP address).

IP Address Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 126

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Standby

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network

standby).

Settings

■ MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

❑ Filter

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Settings

❑ MAC Address 1–10

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted

access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10”

and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to

select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network

devices.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Off (default) Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the

MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access

to the unit.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 127

Multi Zone

Configures the multi zone settings.

■ Main Zone Set

Configures the main zone setting.

❑ Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set

Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings.

❑ Volume

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the

volume adjustment for the corresponding zone.

Settings

• This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.116).

❑ Max Volume

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Default

+16.5 dB

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

❑ Initial Volume

Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

Settings

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Variable (default) Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Off (default)

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby

mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

increments).

(Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.)

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 128

❑ Mono

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output.

Settings

❑ Zone Scene Rename

Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV

screen.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER.

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

❑ Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV

screen.

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone

Set” (p.127).

■ Zone4 Set

Configures the Zone4 settings.

❑ Zone Scene Rename

Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

You can change the scene names in the same manner as “Zone Scene Rename” in

“Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set” (p.128).

❑ Zone Rename

Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone

Set” (p.127).

■ Monitor Out Assign

Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO,

S VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used.

Settings

Main (default), Zone2, Zone3

• To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video

monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from

the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

with a component video cable.

Off (default) Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 129

■ HDMI OUT2 Assign

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

Settings

Main (default), Zone2, Zone4

• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.160).

❑ Audio Output

Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2

Assign” is set to “Zone2”.

■ Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.97) for each zone.

Choice

Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4

Settings

Function

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

■ Input Assignment

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input

source.

■ Procedure

Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2”

Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,

and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER.

On Enables the audio output.

Off (default) Disables the audio output (video output only).

Disable Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable (default)

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party

mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 130

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.

■ Display Set

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

❑ Dimmer (Front Display)

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

Setting range

-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)

Default

• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.132) is set to “On”.

❑ Short Message

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment).

Settings

❑ Wallpaper

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

Settings

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2

Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone

or input switching.

❑ Trigger Mode

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

Settings

Source

Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching

when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.

Choices

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH

Settings

Manual

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger

Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of

the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Choices

On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

Picture 1 (default),

Picture 2, Picture 3

Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

Power (default)

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the

zone specified with “Target Zone”.

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in

the zone specified with “Target Zone”.

An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in

“Source”.

Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal

transmission with “Manual”.

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input

source specified in this option.

High (default)

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source

specified in this option.

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High (default) Transmits the electronic signal.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 131

❑ Target Zone

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Settings

■ DC OUT

Configures the DC OUT jack setting.

❑ Power Mode

Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT

jack.

Settings

■ Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Settings

• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

Main

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.

Zone2

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.

Zone3

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with power status of Zone3.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with input switching in Zone3.

Zone4

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with power status of Zone4.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with input switching in Zone4.

All (default)

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of any zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in any zone.

Continuous (default)

Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of

the power state (on/standby) of the unit.

Main Zone Power

Sync.

Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is

turned on.

(This setting may not work properly on some accessories.)

Off (default) Does not protect the settings.

On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

Icon

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 132

ECO

Configures the power supply settings.

■ Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for

the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.

Settings

Default

U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours

Other models: Off

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the

front display.

■ ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.

When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.

Settings

• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.

• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.

• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

Language

Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

2 hours, 4 hours,

8 hours, 12 hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for

the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit

will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

Off (default) Disables the eco mode.

On Enables the eco mode.

English (default) English

Japanese

French

German

Spanish

Russian

Italian

Chinese

Français

Deutsch

Español

Italiano

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 133

You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Types of information

■ Audio Signal

Displays information about the current audio signal.

• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the

specifications and settings of the playback device.

■ Video Signal

Displays information about the current video signal.

■ HDMI Monitor

Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.

Viewing information about the unit

(Information menu)

Input

Format Audio format of the input signal

Channel

The number of source channels in the input signal

(front/surround/LFE)

For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total

(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).

Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output

HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Analog Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT

jacks (analog)

Interface TV interface

Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 134

■ Network

Displays the network information on the unit.

■ System

Displays the system information on the unit.

• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of

the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You

can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating

the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.146).

■ Multi Zone

Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4.

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

Set the unit to standby mode.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on

again.

The new settings take effect.

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server

MAC Address MAC address

Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.126)

Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack

Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.135)

TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.136)

Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.135)

Tuner Freq. Step

(Asia and General models only)

The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.136)

System ID System ID number

Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit

Input The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4

Volume The volume for Zone2 or Zone3

Configuring the system settings

(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 135

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected.

Settings

Turning on/off the remote control sensor

(REMOTE SENSOR)

Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor

is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.

Settings

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:

ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a

unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings

ID1 (default), ID2

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be

automatically canceled.

Press SETUP.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER.

Press RECEIVER z and press ENTER.

Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).

Item Function Page

SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 135

REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 135

REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 135

TUNER FRQ STEP

(Asia and General models only)

Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

136

TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 136

MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 136

RECOV./BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings

from the backup.

137

INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 137

FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 137

VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 137

6  MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You

can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

8  MIN (default)

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the

unit.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

8MIN

SPEAKERIMP.

ON (default) Turns on the remote control sensor.

OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

ON

REMOTESENSOR

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

ID1

REMOTECONAMP

PRESET

5020

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 136

Press ENTER to confirm the setting.

Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, “OK” appears in the display

window.

If “ERROR” appears, registration failed. Repeat from step 3.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

• The registered remote control codes (p.138) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting

(TUNER FRQ STEP)

(Asia and General models only)

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or

region.

Settings

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.

Settings

NTSC, PAL

Default

U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC

Other models: PAL

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output

(MONITOR CHECK)

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI

OUT jack.

Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”

(p.122) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a

different resolution than the detected resolution.

Settings

• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV

after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.

FM100/AM10

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz

steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.

FM50/AM9 (default)

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps

and AM by 9-kHz steps.

OUT

ZONE

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM50/AM9

TUNERFRQSTEP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

NTSC

TVFORMAT

YES (default)

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

resolution supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

YES

MONITORCHECK

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 137

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.

■ Backup/recovery procedure

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO

to start the process.

Choices

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Choices

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit

is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For

details, refer to the information supplied with updates.

■ Firmware update procedure

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure

you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to

start firmware update.

Choices

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after

ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in

“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.146).

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.134) in the “Information” menu.

• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.

RECOVERY

Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when

backup has been created).

Note

• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored

correctly.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).

VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

BACKUP

RECOV./BACKUP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

CANCEL

INITIALIZE

USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

USB

FIRMUPDATE

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

x.xx

VERSION

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 138

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices

(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control

code of the external device. You can also use the macro function to

sequentially operate multiple functions at once.

Press SETUP.

• If no operation is performed within 30 seconds, the remote control

automatically exits from the setup menu.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and

press ENTER.

• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.

Registering remote control codes

■

Registering the remote control code for a TV

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have

registered its remote control code.

• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection

keys (p.139). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to

operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM

to find your TV’s remote control code.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.

If that does not work, try the other codes.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and

press ENTER.

Press TV z and press ENTER.

Controlling external devices with the remote control

Item Function Page

LEARN

Assigns a function to each key by learning the code

from other remote controls.

140

PRESET

Registers the remote control code for external

devices.

138

RENAME

Edits the device names or scene names displayed

on the remote control’s display window.

141

MACRO

Programs macro operations (sequence of control

commands).

142

CLEAR Clears the remote control configurations. 144

ERASE Erases a function assigned to each key by learning. 145

EX-IR

Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the

authorized custom installers only.

—

SETUP

PRESET

Item name

PRESET

----

“----” (empty) or code currently registered

2 3

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENHAN

SUR

HDMI

MEM

INF

LEVE

SOU

EIVE

UDI

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

IRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

SETUP

TV z

ENTER

Cursor keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 139

Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the

4-digit remote control code and press ENTER.

Once the remote control code is successfully registered,

“OK” appears in the display window.

If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from

Step 3.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

❑ TV operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you

can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input

source selected on the unit.

■ Registering the remote control codes for

playback devices

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if

you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use

the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are

controlled by the remote control, because their remote control

codes are assigned to the input selection keys.

• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all

the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI

Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This

function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)

• If you have registered the remote control code for an external device to the [A], [B]

or [C] key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching

the input source after pressing the key.

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM

to find the remote control code for your playback

device.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If

that does not work, try the other codes.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 2.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and

press ENTER.

Press a corresponding input selection key and

press ENTER.

For example, press AV1 to set the remote control code for

the playback device connected to the AV1 jack.

Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the

4-digit remote control and press ENTER.

Once the remote control code is successfully registered,

“OK” appears in the display window.

If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from

Step 3.

TV operation keys

INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV.

MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV.

TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV.

TV CH Switch the channels of the TV.

TV z Turns on/off the TV.

PRESET

5098

Code currently registered

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENHAN

SUR

HDMI

MEM

INF

LEVE

SOU

EIVE

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

PUR

IRE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

SETUP

ENTER

Input selection keys

TV operation keys

Numeric keys

Cursor keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 140

To set another remote control code, repeat Steps 4

and 5.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to

“Configuring scene assignments” (p.63).

❑ Playback device operations

Once you have registered the remote control code for your

playback device, you can control it using the following keys after

selecting the input source or scene.

• By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or

external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and

numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in

orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. For

example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on

TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when

SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when

SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.

• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback

device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.

Programming from other remote controls

(learning)

The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals

from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control

operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your

playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work

after you register the remote control code, use the learning function

to assign a function to each key.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and

press ENTER.

Press one of the following keys depending on the

type of your device.

For playback device: press the input selection key

(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is

connected).

For TV: press TV z.

SOURCE z Turns on/off the playback device.

Menu operation

keys

Cursor keys Select an item.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

DISPLAY Switches information on the display.

MODE Switches between modes.

External device

operation keys

TOP MENU Displays the top menu.

POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu.

s Stops playback.

d Stops playback temporarily.

Starts playback of the selected

song/video.

Searches forward/backward (by

holding down).

Skips forward/backward.

Numeric keys Enter numerical values.

TV operation keys Control the TV (p.139).

LEARN

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

NHAN

SUR

HDMI

MEM

INF

LEVE

UDI

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

PUR

IRE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

PRE

REE

PTI

SETUP

TV z

MODE

DISPLAY

ENTER

SOURCE/RECEIVER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

TV operation keys

Numeric keys

External device

operation keys

External device

operation keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 141

Press ENTER.

Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls

at each other.

Perform the following steps (a and b) within

10 seconds.

a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to

assign a function.

For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys,

DISPLAY, MODE, external device operation keys, numeric keys

For TV: TV operation keys

b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is

learned until “OK” appears in the display window.

If “NG” appears, learning has failed. Repeat from Step 4.

Repeat Steps 3 to 6 until all desired operations are

learned.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions (may be

decreased depending on the signals). If “FULL” appears in the display

window, clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for the

new functions.

Editing device names

You can edit the device names or scene names displayed on the

remote control’s display window.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “RENAME” and

press ENTER.

Press one of the following keys to select a device or

a scene.

For playback device: press the input selection key

(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected).

For TV: press TV z.

For AV receiver (the unit): press RECEIVER z.

For scene: press one of the SCENE keys.

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-AU X

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

MUTE

Remote control of external device

5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart

Note

• If you press RECEIVER z in Step 3, you can assign functions of an external

receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or

numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If

you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following

steps.

a Press SETUP.

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and press ENTER.

d Press RECEIVER z.

e Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display.

f To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

RENAME

2 3

4 6

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENHAN

SUR

HDMI

MEM

INF

LEVE

SOU

EIVE

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

PUR

IRE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

PRE

REE

PTI

SETUP

TV z

MODE

DISPLAY

ENTER

SCENE

RECEIVER z

Input selection keys

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

TV operation keys

Numeric keys

External device

operation keys

External device

operation keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 142

• To edit scene names of each zone, press one of the SCENE keys and press

ZONE to select a zone.

Press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to rename.

To locate the position, use the cursor keys (e/r).

To select a character (A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space,

symbols), use the cursor keys (q/w).

Press ENTER to register the new name.

Once the new name is successfully registered, “OK”

appears in the display window.

To edit another device name (or scene name), repeat

Steps 3 to 6.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

Operating multiple functions at once

(macro)

The macro function allows you to sequentially operate multiple

functions at once.

For example, when you want to listen to a CD, you can turn on the

CD player, select the corresponding input source on the unit and

start playback on the CD player sequentially with a single key

operation.

■ Enabling the macro operations

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ON” and press

ENTER.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

• To disable the macro operations, select “OFF” in Step 3.

BD/DVD

MACRO

ON

RECEIVER

“MACRO” lights up (when macro operations are enabled)

RECEIVER

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

2 3

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOU

EIVE

UDI

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

REE

PTI

ENHAN

SUR

HDMI

LEVE

SETUP

ZONE

ENTER

SCENE

Cursor keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 143

By default, the following macro operations are available after

pressing a macro operation key when the macro operations are

enabled.

■ Programming macro operations

You can program up to 10 remote control commands for each

macro operation key. If you press the corresponding macro

operation key, the multiple operations will be carried out

sequentially according to the programmed remote control

commands.

• Before programming macro operations, you need to register the remote control

codes (p.138) or assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.140).

• We do not recommend including continuous operations (such as volume

adjustment) in macro operations.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “EDIT” and

press ENTER.

Press the macro operation key (RECEIVER z or

input selection key) to which macro operations are

assigned and press ENTER.

“MACRO 1” appears in the display window.

Press the keys for functions (up to 10) you want to

include in the macro operations in sequence.

To switch the devices (the unit or external device) to control,

press SOURCE/RECEIVER.

(Example)

Programming for aturning on the unit, bselecting “AV1” as

the input source, cturning on the DVD player assigned to

“AV1” and dturning on the TV

a (MACRO 1) Press RECEIVER z.

b (MACRO 2) Press AV1.

c (MACRO 3) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select

“AV1” and press SOURCE z.

d (MACRO 4) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select

“TV” and press TV z.

To confirm the setting, hold down ENTER until “OK”

appears on the window display.

If you have programmed 10 functions, “FULL” appears and

the setting is confirmed automatically.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

Macro operation key

Macro operations

1st command 2nd commend

RECEIVER z Turns on the unit. (unregistered)

Input selection keys Turns on the unit.

Selects the

corresponding input

source. (unregistered

for the [A], [B] and [C]

keys)

MACRO

EDIT

MACRO1

2 3

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENHAN

SUR

HDMI

MEM

INF

LEVE

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

IRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

SETUP

TV z

ENTER

RECEIVER z

SOURCE/RECEIVER

Input selection keys

Cursor keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 144

Resetting the remote control configurations

■ Clearing the remote control configurations

You can clear remote control configurations by selecting a type of

settings or clear all the remote control configurations.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the settings to

be cleared and press ENTER.

“ALL” appears in the display window.

To apply the selection to all the corresponding keys,

proceed to Step 5.

To apply the selection to a specific key, proceed to Step 4.

• When “RESET” is selected, all remote control configurations will be cleared.

You cannot select a specific key. Proceed to step 5.

Press a key to which the selected process is

applied.

When “LEARN” or “PRESET” is selected: press the

input selection key or TV

When “RENAME” is selected: press the input selection

key, RECEIVER z, TV z or SCENE.

When “MACRO” is selected: press the macro operation

key (input selection key or RECEIVER z).

Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the

window display.

If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat

from Step 2.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

LEARN

Clears the functions learned from other remote

controls.

PRESET Restores the default remote control code settings.

RENAME Restores the default device name settings.

MACRO Clears the macro operation settings.

RESET

Clears all remote control configurations and

restores default settings.

CLEAR

PRESET

ALL

2 3

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

ENHAN

SUR

HDMI

MEM

INF

LEVE

SOU

EIVE

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

IRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

SETUP

TV z

ENTER

SCENE

RECEIVER z

Input selection keys

Cursor keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 145

■ Erasing a function assigned to each key by

learning

You can erase a function assigned to each key by learning and

restore the default key assignments.

Press SETUP.

Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,

repeat from Step 1.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ERASE” and

press ENTER.

Press one of the following keys to select the device

for which key assignments will be cleared.

For playback device: press the input selection key.

For TV: press TV z.

Press ENTER.

Hold down the key to be reset until “OK” appears on

the window display.

If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat

from Step 2.

Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all desired key

assignments are erased.

To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP.

ERASE

2 3

TUN./ CH

ENHANCER

SUR.

DECODE

HDMI OUT

MEMORY

INFO AM

PAR TY

LEVELENT

SETUPZONE

SLEEP

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

NHAN

SUR

HDMI

MEM

LEVE

SOU

EIVE

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

IRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

SETUP

TV z

ENTER

Cursor keys

Input selection keys

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 146

New firmware that provides additional features or product

improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected

to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and

update it.

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.137).

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed

after ON SCREEN is pressed.

Read the on-screen description.

To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to

select “START” and press ENTER.

The on-screen display turns off.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”

appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z

on the front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation

mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a

message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.134). You can update the

unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network

Note

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during

firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more

(depending on your Internet connection speed).

• If the Internet connection speed is slow or if the unit is connected to the

wireless network via a wireless network adapter, network update may not be

possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,

try the firmware update later or use the USB memory device (p.137).

Information

icon

Message

System Icon

SOURCE

RECEIVER

AUDIO

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

V-A UX

1 2 3 4

MULTI

PHONO

USB NET

TUNER

[ C ][ A ] [ B ]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

CLUB

ENTERTAIN

MOVIE

STEREO STRAIGHT

INPUT

PURE

DIRECT

MUTE

SCENE

1 2 3 4

PROGRAM

VOLUME

TV VOL

MUTE

MODE

TOP MENU

RETURN DISPLAY

POP-UP/MENU

TV CH

PRESET

ENTER

ON SCREEN

OPTION

SOU

EIVE

V-

MUL

TUNE

[

]

[

]

[

]

CLASSICAL

LIVE

ENTE

TERE

TRAI

INPU

PUR

DIRE

MUTE

OGR

LUME

MUTE

RETURN

P-

MEN

PRE

REE

PTI

ENTER

Cursor keys

APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 147

APPENDIX

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound

balance...

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to

optimize the speaker settings again (p.50). If you want to adjust the speaker settings

manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.116).

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the

volume control...

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or

speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum

volume level for the unit in advance (p.120). You can also set the maximum volume for

Zone2 or Zone3 (p.127).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning

on the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically

applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the

volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.121). You can also set the initial

volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.127).

We are bothered by volume differences when switching

between input sources…

You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in

the “Option” menu (p.101).

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at

all...

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.161). After

connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This

setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your

system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback

devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during

operations...

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you

when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.130) in the

“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by

utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.131).

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another

Yamaha product as well as the unit...

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another

Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,

remote control (p.135).

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device

even when the unit is in standby mode...

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output

videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in

standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu

to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when

this function is enabled.

Frequently asked questions

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 148

Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:

a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets

securely.

b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.

c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times

consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby

indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.23).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used

for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”

menu to “Off” (p.132).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.135).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short

circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.23).

The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of

the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.132).

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 149

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote

control.

The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).

The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or

strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key

lights up in orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.135).

External devices cannot be controlled using the

remote control.

The remote control is set to control the unit.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices

(the key lights up in green).

The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.

Set the remote control code again (p.138). Even if the remote control code is

registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.

The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be

controlled using the remote control.

A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to

V-AUX.

Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.144).

The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself.

The remote control does not learn new functions.

The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external

device are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.140).

The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not

compatible with the remote control.

Learning is impossible in this case.

Memory capacity is full.

Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions

(p.145).

Problem Cause Remedy

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 150

Audio

Problem Cause Remedy

No sound.

Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio

format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.133).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume cannot be increased.

The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.120).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.133).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the

speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.119).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.50) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change

the speaker settings (p.117).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.50) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the

speaker volume (p.119).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be

malfunctioning.

No sound is coming from the surround back

speaker.

The extended surround is disabled.

Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used

(p.101).

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency

signals.

To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the

front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.118).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.50) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup”

menu to “Use” (p.118).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

No sound from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from

the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.124).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 151

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is

used).

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the

speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with

an HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.35).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)

The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack

(p.124).

(If you are trying to use ARC)

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.124). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the

unit with HDMI).

The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is

disabled.

Set “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.129).

Only the front speakers work on multichannel

audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as

PCM) only.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.133). If necessary,

change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

Noise/hum is heard.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The sound is distorted.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.132).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

The sound is interrupted.

If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or

Zone4, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone

operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.94).

Problem Cause Remedy

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 152

Video

Problem Cause Remedy

No video.

Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.136).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

No video from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video

Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.133). For information about video signals

supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.162).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video is interrupted.

(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)

Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.

Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you

are using (p.61).

(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4)

HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone

operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.94).

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 153

FM/AM radio

Problem Cause Remedy

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

(U.S.A. model only)

Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio

reception (p.103).

(Except for U.S.A. model)

Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio

reception (p.103).

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor

AM antenna.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Select the station manually (p.70).

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

The AM radio signal is weak.

Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Select the station manually (p.70).

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with

the supplied AM antenna.

AM radio stations cannot be registered as

presets.

Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A.

model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.71).

The unit does not receive HD Radio signals.

(U.S.A. model only)

The unit is in the monaural reception mode. Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.103).

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 154

USB and network

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit does not detect the USB device.

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be

viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The files in the USB device cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained

properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”

menu to “On” on the unit (p.125). If you want to configure the network parameters

manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other

network devices in your network (p.125).

The unit does not detect the PC.

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music

contents are shared (p.84).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access

of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.126).

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played

back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For

information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music

stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.84).

The files in the PC cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have

been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting

silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try

the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your

network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.

The port number varies depending on the radio station.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV

CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the

unit (p.126).

Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.137).

APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 155

Error indications on the front display

Message Cause Remedy

Access denied Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared

(p.84).

Access error

The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.77).

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.46).

Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

MHL Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile

device.

Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device.

No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn

it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.135).

Remote Off

The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the

remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.135).

Unable to play

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for

some reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some

reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be

defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some

reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the

formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.84). If

the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with

heavy traffic.

USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 156

Audio information

■ Audio decoding format

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby

Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:

“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three

modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for

game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a

high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This

format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital

Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This

decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a

surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a

discrete surround back channel is recorded.

DTS Express

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher

compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is

developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on

BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home

theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete

full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super

Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest

frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology

offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

FLAC

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio

formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3

One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this

compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data

quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming

services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality

than MP3.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)

PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This

technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called

Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

Glossary

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 157

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit

Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal

is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.

• Sampling frequency

Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.

When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.

• Quantization bit

The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a

numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more

accurate.

WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by

converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other

compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic

technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of

compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

■ Others

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification

connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a

consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This

channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio

effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Lip sync

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an

increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag

between audio and video output.

HDMI and video information

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and

the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined

and transmitted with a single cable.

Deep Color

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available

colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems

process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology

allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate

on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video

signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable

without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a

secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“

http://www.hdmi.org/”.

MHL

MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission

that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals

from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL

complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).

S-video signal

With the S-video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the C

signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. This technology achieves more accurate color

reproduction than the composite video signal system.

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than

sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,

natural images.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 158

Yamaha technologies

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is

best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions

(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are

differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,

Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own

home.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the

accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

CINEMA DSP HD³

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP HD³ feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the

accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music

formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound

system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with

front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)

Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without

presence speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in

your room.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 159

Video signal flow

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are

output to a TV as shown below.

m (solid line) is always available. , (dotted line)

is available only when “Analog to Analog Conversion”

(p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” (default).

■ Video conversion table

• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu.

• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

HDMI HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

S VIDEO

VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out

SVIDEO

out

VIDEO

out

Resolution

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p 4K

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p

480i/

576i

480i/

576i

HDMI in

480i/576i mmmmmm

480p/576p mmmmm

720p mmmm

1080i mmmm

1080p/

50, 60 Hz

mmmm

1080p/24 Hz

4K m

COMPONENT

VIDEO

480i/576i mmmmmmm ,,

480p/576p mmmmm m

720p mmmm m

1080i mmmm m

1080p m

S VIDEO in

480i/576i mmmmmm, m,

VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm, ,m

Video device The unit TV

HDMI outHDMI in

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

COMPONENT

VIDEO out

VIDEO outVIDEO in

S VIDEO outS VIDEO in

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 160

Multi-zone output

■ Audio output

m: Available

*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On)

*2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4”

*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input

source selected in the main zone is selected)

*4 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the

main zone is selected)

*5 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input

■ Video output

m: Available

*6 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.128) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3”

*7 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone4”

*8 Not available in Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

Using the unit's

internal amplifier (p.32)

Using an external amplifier (p.92)

Out

EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks ZONE OUT jacks

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack

Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 Zone3 Zone2 (*1) Zone4 (*2)

Digital audio (HDMI) m (*3) m (*3) m (*3) m (*4)

Digital audio

(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)

m (*5) m (*5) m (*5)

Analog audio

(AUDIO)

mmmmm

USB (including iPod) mmmmm

Network sources mmmmm

TUNER mmmmm

Out

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*6)

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT)

jack (*7)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

S VIDEO VIDEO

Zone2/3 Zone2/3 Zone2/3 Zone2 Zone4

HDMI video mm

Component video m

S-video m

Composite video m

On-screen display

(browse/playback)

m (*8) m (*8) m (*8) m

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 161

HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as

power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback

devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with

an HDMI cable.

For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.35) and “Connecting video

devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.41).

Operations available from the TV’s remote control

• Standby synchronization

• Volume control including mute

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

(Example)

Operations available from the unit’s remote control

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene

selection (p.62)

• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)

• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering

remote control codes (p.139)

(Example)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after

connecting the TV and playback devices.

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as

HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.124) in the “Setup”

menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and

“Standby Sync”).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and

playback devices.

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

Check the followings.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.

If not, select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Information on HDMI

HDMI Control

Turn off the TV

The unit turns off

(standby)

HDMI Control

Playback device

also turns off

HDMI Control

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

Turns on and displays

video from the playback

device

HDMI Control

Playback starts

APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 162

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning

off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in

Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices

exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works

more effectively.

HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

Video signals

The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending

on the type of the DVD player.

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction

manual for each device.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device

outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),

HD DVD

DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video

Bitstream

(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD

High Resolution Audio, DTS

Express

BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD

• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 163

• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.

Reference diagram (rear panel)

NETWORKDC OUT

0.5A

( 3

NET

)

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

TRIGGER

OUT

RS-232C

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

IN OUT IN OUT

AV 1

AV 3

REMOTE

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 2

AV 4

AV OUT

AV 3 AV 4AV 2AV 1

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

OPTICAL

AUDIO 4

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE OUT/PRE OUT

AUDIO 3AUDIO 2AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

ZONE 2 /

F.PRESENSE

ZONE 3 /

R.PRESENSE

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/

ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE

COAXIAL

R L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE) (FRONT)

(REAR)

EXTRA SP1

EXTRA SP2

12V 0.1A

75Ω

ANTENNA

HD Radio

(4 RADIO)

(RX-A3030 U.S.A. model)

APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 164

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;

7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the

Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a

trademark of DTS, Inc.

“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been

designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the

developer to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.

AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.

and other countries.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

This receiver supports network connections.

HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.

HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of

HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United

States and/or other countries.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network

Windows™

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or

trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Android™

Android is a trademark of Google Inc.

Rovi™

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other

intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Rovi

Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by

Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Trademarks

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 165

Input jacks

• Analog Audio

Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX)

MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)

(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)

• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

Optical x 4 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1, V-AUX)

Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2)

•Video

Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)

S-video x 4 (AV 1–4)

Component x 4 (AV 1–4)

• HDMI Input

HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*)

* V-AUX: MHL input compatible

•Others

USB x 1 (USB2.0)

NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

Output jacks

• Analog Audio

- Speaker Out x 11 (9 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND

L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R

, EXTRA SP 2

L/R

)

*1 Note: Assignment is possible

[ZONE2, ZONE3, F.PRESENCE, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

*2 Note: Assignment is possible

[ZONE2, ZONE3, R.PRESENCE]

- Subwoofer Out x 2

(SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2)

- Audio x 1 (AV OUT)

[RX-A3030]

- Pre Out x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R

, R.PRESENCE L/R

)

*3 Note: barter to ZONE2

*4 Note: barter to ZONE3

[RX-A2030]

- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R)

- ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3)

• Digital Audio

Optical x 1 (AV OUT)

•Video

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

- Composite x 1

-S-video x 1

- Component x 1

AV OUT

- Composite x 1

-S-video x 1

• HDMI Output

HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2

)

*5 barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4)

Other jacks

• YPAO MIC x 1

• REMOTE IN x 2

• REMOTE OUT x 2

• TRIGGER OUT x 2

• RS-232C x 1

• DC OUT x 1

HDMI

• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC

(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

-VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

- 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

-Dolby TrueHD

- Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital

- DTS-HD Master Audio

- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

- DTS Express

-DTS

- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

• Link Function: CEC supported

MHL

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

-VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A

Specifications

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 166

TUNER

• Analog Tuner

[U.K. and Europe models]

FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

[Other models]

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

• HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER)

USB

• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory

• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A

Network

• PC Client Function

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

• AirPlay supported

• Internet Radio

Compatible Decoding Formats

• Decoding Format

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

- DTS Digital Surround

• Post Decoding Format

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic II Game

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Audio Section

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

[RX-A3030]

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.......................................................... 150 W+150 W

Center...........................................................................150 W

Surround L/R ................................................... 150 W+150 W

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 150 W+150 W

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 150 W+150 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.......................................................... 165 W+165 W

Center...........................................................................165 W

Surround L/R ................................................... 165 W+165 W

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 165 W+165 W

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 165 W+165 W

[RX-A2030]

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.......................................................... 140 W+140 W

Center...........................................................................140 W

Surround L/R ................................................... 140 W+140 W

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 140 W+140 W

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 140 W+140 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R.......................................................... 155 W+155 W

Center...........................................................................155 W

Surround L/R ................................................... 155 W+155 W

Surround Back L/R .......................................... 155 W+155 W

Front Presence L/R.......................................... 155 W+155 W

• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)

[RX-A3030]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R..................................................................185 W/ch

Center .....................................................................185 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................185 W/ch

Surround Back L/R..................................................185 W/ch

Front Presence L/R..................................................185 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models].......................230 W/ch

[RX-A2030]

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R..................................................................175 W/ch

Center .....................................................................175 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................175 W/ch

Surround Back L/R..................................................175 W/ch

Front Presence L/R..................................................175 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models].......................220 W/ch

• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)

(JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8



)

[China, Korea, Asia and General models]

[RX-A3030]

Front L/R..................................................................230 W/ch

Center .....................................................................230 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................230 W/ch

Surround Back L/R..................................................230 W/ch

Front Presence L/R..................................................230 W/ch

[RX-A2030]

Front L/R..................................................................220 W/ch

Center .....................................................................220 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................220 W/ch

Surround Back L/R..................................................220 W/ch

Front Presence L/R..................................................220 W/ch

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

[RX-A3030]

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )................................175/220/295/410 W

[RX-A2030]

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )................................165/210/285/405 W

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 167

• Damping Factor

Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more

• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance

PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ................................3.5 mV/47 k

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ).......................200 mV/47 k

• Maximum Input Signal

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD)............................... 60 mV or more

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more

• Output Level / Output Impedance

AV OUT ..............................................................200 mV/1.2 k

HEADPHONE OUT .............................................150 mV/100 

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ........................................1.0 V/1.2 k

Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) ............................1.0 V/1.2 k

ZONE OUT.............................................................1.0 V/1.2 k

• Frequency Response

AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ............................... +0/-3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz)..........................................0±0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to AV OUT..............................................0.02% or less

MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 )

.............................................................................0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

PHONO to AV OUT (Input Shorted 5 mV)

[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ...86 dB or more

[Other models]....................................................81 dB or more

AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV)

..........................................................................100 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Front L/R (Speaker Out)......................................150 µV or less

• Channel Separation

PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ... 60 dB/55 dB or more

AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 5.1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

................................................................. 60 dB/45 dB or more

• Volume Control

Main Zone ................MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

Zone2/Zone3 ............MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

• Tone Control Characteristics

Main Zone

Bass Boost/Cut......................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)

Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

Treble Turnover...........................................................3.5 kHz

Zone2/Zone3

Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)

Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut........................... ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)

Treble Turnover...........................................................3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)

................................................................................. 12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.

Video Section

• Video Signal Type

[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]................ NTSC

[Other models] ................................................................... PAL

• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) ..................... NTSC/PAL

• Video Signal Level

Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 

S-video

Y ......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 

C (NTSC) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]

.................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 

C (PAL) [Other models]................................... 0.3 Vp-p/75 

Component

Y ......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 

Pb/Pr................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 

• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)

.......................................................................1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off).....60 dB or more

• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)

Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)

........................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM Section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models].............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models]

...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models]................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)

Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] .....................72 dB/70 dB

HD [U.S.A. model] ...........................................................80 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] ........................0.3%/0.5%

HD [U.S.A. model] ..........................................................0.03%

• Antenna Input................................................ 75  unbalanced

AM section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models]...................530 kHz to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models]......530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models].........................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz

General

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models].......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General model]............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model]............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] .............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Asia model].................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 168

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. model] .................................................... 490 W/620 VA

[Canada model].................................................. 400 W/510 VA

[Korea model]................................................................. 390 W

[Other models]................................................................ 490 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off

[General model]...............................................0.35 W (Typical)

[Other models]...................................................0.3 W (Typical)

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On............5.0 W (Typical)

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through On (AV 1, No Signals)

...........................................................................4.2 W (Typical)

Network Standby On .........................................2.2 W (Typical)

• Maximum Power Consumption

[Asia and General models]........................................... 1210 W

• Dimensions (W x H x D)

...................... 435 x 192 x 467 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-3/8”)

* Including legs and protrusions

•Weight

[RX-A3030]

[China, U.K. and Europe models] ............. 19.9 kg (43.9 lbs)

[Other models]........................................... 18.2 kg (40.1 lbs)

[RX-A2030] ................................................... 17.1 kg (37.7 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 169

Symbols

Exclamation mark (!) 146

Lock icon (o) 131

Numerics

16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 122

2.1-channel system 21

2ch Stereo (sound program) 67

3.1-channel system 21

4K signal (video signal resolution) 162

5.1-channel system 20

, 21

5ch +FRONT+2ZONE

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116

5ch +FRONT+2ZONE (speaker configuration) 29

7.1-channel system 20

7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116

7ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 30

7ch +2ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116

7ch +2ZONE (speaker configuration) 31

7ch +FP+RP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116

7ch +FP+RP (speaker configuration) 28

7ch +FRONT+1ZONE

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116

7ch +FRONT+1ZONE (speaker configuration) 29

7ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116

7ch BI-AMP (speaker configuration) 26

7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 117

7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 26

7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP

(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 117

7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP (speaker configuration) 27

9.2+1-channel system 19

9.2-channel system 19

, 20

9ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116

9ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 30

9ch +FRONT (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116

9ch +FRONT (speaker configuration) 28

9ch +RP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116

9ch +RP (speaker configuration) 27

9ch Stereo (sound program) 67

Access denied (error indication) 155

Access error (error indication) 155

Action Game (sound program) 66

Adaptive DRC (Option menu) 100

Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 121

Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 120

Adjustment (Video Mode, Setup menu) 123

ADVANCED SETUP menu 134

Advanced speaker configuration 24

Adventure (sound program) 66

AirPlay 89

Album (HD Radio™) 72

AM antenna connection 45

AM radio listening 70

Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 124

Analog to Analog Conversion

(Video, Setup menu) 122

Angle (YPAO measurement result) 57

Angle measurement (YPAO) 53

, 56

ARC (Audio Return Channel) 35

ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 124

Artist/Song (HD Radio™) 72

Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 122

Audio Decoder (front display information) 98

Audio device connection 43

Audio file format (PC/NAS) 84

Audio file format (USB storage device) 81

AUDIO jack 34

Audio Mode (Option menu) 103

Audio Output (HDMI OUT2 Assign, Setup menu) 129

Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 124

Audio program selection (HD Radio™) 72

Audio Return Channel (ARC) 35

Audio Select (Option menu) 102

Audio Signal (Information menu) 133

Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 132

Auto Preset (FM radio) 76

Auto Preset (HD Radio™) 74

Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 50

Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 120

Automatic speaker setting optimization 50

Automatic station preset (FM radio) 76

Automatic station preset (HD Radio™) 74

AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 132

AV OUT jack 13

Backup/recovery of the settings 137

Banana plug 23

Basic playback operation 61

Basic speaker configuration 19

Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 100

Bi-amp speaker connection 32

Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133

Bitstream 162

Brightness (Video Mode, Setup menu) 123

CAT-5 cable 46

Category (HD Radio™) 72

Cellar Club (sound program) 67

Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 117

Center Image (Sound Program menu) 111

Center Width (Sound Program menu) 111

Chamber (sound program) 67

Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133

Check SP Wires (error indication) 155

Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 59

Church in Freiburg (sound program) 67

Church in Royaumont (sound program) 67

CINEMA DSP 3D 65

Index

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 170

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) 100

CINEMA DSP HD³ 65

CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 67

Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 76

Clear Preset (HD Radio™) 74

Clearing (remote control) 144

Clock Time (Radio Data System) 74

COAXIAL jack 34

Component video cable 34

Component video connection (video device) 41

COMPONENT VIDEO jack 34

Composite video connection (video device) 42

Compressed Music Enhancer 69

Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 117

Contrast (Video Mode, Setup menu) 123

Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 50

DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 131

DC OUT jack 13

Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 110

Decoder Mode (Input menu) 105

Decoder Off (front display information) 98

Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 125

Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 134

Default setting restoration 137

Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 120

Detail (Load, Scene menu) 108

Detail Enhancement (Video Mode, Setup menu) 123

Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 107

DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 125

Dialog Adjust (Option menu) 101

Dialog Lift (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 101

Dialog Lvl (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 101

Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133

Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) 101

Dialogue Level (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 101

Dialogue Lift (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 101

Dialogue normalization level 133

Digital coaxial cable 34

Digital Media Controller (DMC) 106

Digital optical cable 34

Dimension (Sound Program menu) 111

Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 130

Direct (Sound Program menu) 111

Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 156

DISPLAY key 15

Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 130

Display window (remote control) 15

Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 118

Distance (YPAO measurement result) 57

DLNA 84

DMC (Digital Media Controller) 106

DMC Control (Input menu) 106

DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 125

DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 134

Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 101

Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 68

Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 68

Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 68

Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 68

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game (surround decoder) 68

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 101

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (surround decoder) 68

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 101

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (surround decoder) 68

Drama (sound program) 66

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 156

DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 110

SP Program (front d

isplay information) 98

DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 68

DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) 68

DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 101

Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 120

ECO (Setup menu) 132

ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 132

Edge Enhancement (Video Mode, Setup menu) 123

Enhancer (Option menu) 102

ENHANCER (sound mode) 69

ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 66

Erasing (remote control) 145

Error indication (front display) 155

EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 101

EXTD Surround (Option menu) 101

Extended Surround (Option menu) 101

External device control (remote control) 138

External device operation key (remote control) 15

External power amplifier 33

, 92

Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 118

Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 126

FIRM UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 137

Firmware update 137

Firmware update (network) 137

, 146

Firmware update (USB) 137

Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 134

Firmware version check 137

FM antenna connection 45

FM Mode (Option menu) 103

FM radio listening 70

FM/AM radio tuning 70

Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133

Frequency (FM/AM radio) 70

Frequency step setting 70

, 136

Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 117

Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 111

Front display (part names and functions) 12

Front display brightness 130

Front display information 98

Front panel (part names and functions) 10

Front panel door (front panel) 10

Front panel jack connection 44

Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 118

Function (Setup menu) 129

GND terminal 43

Ground lead 43

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 171

Hall in Amsterdam (sound program) 67

Hall in Munich (sound program) 67

Hall in Vienna (sound program) 67

HD Radio™ information 72

HD Radio™ tuning 72

HDMI (Setup menu) 124

HDMI cable 34

HDMI connection (video device) 41

HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 124

HDMI jack 34

HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 133

HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 125

HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 125

HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 129

HDMI output selection 61

HDMI signal compatibility 162

Headphones 65

Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 111

High definition audio 162

High speed HDMI cable 34

Hi-Res Mode (Enhancer, Option menu) 102

Hold/Unhold (HD Radio™, Option menu) 73

In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 101

Indicator (part names and functions) 12

INFO key 11

, 16

Information display (front display) 12

Information menu 133

Information switching (front display) 98

Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 110

Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 121

Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 127

Initial Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 127

INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 137

Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133

Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 129

Input jack assignment 129

Input menu 104

Input selection key (remote control) 15

Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 101

Internal Error (error indication) 155

Internal Error (YPAO error message) 59

Internet radio listening 87

IP Address (Network, Information menu) 134

IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 125

iPod charge 77

iPod connection 77

iPod content playback 78

iPod content playback (AirPlay) 89

iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 89

Language (Setup menu) 132

Learning (remote control) 140

Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 111

Level (Sound Program menu) 111

Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 119

Level (YPAO measurement result) 57

Level Error (YPAO warning message) 60

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 157

LIGHT key 15

Lipsync 157

Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 120

LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 67

Liveness (Sound Program menu) 110

Load (Scene menu) 107

Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 157

MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 126

MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 134

MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 126

Macro (remote control) 142

Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 127

Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 116

Manual speaker configuration 116

Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 71

Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 120

Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 127

Max Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 127

Measurement result (YPAO) 57

Media sharing setup 84

Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 131

Menu language selection 49

Menu operation key (front panel) 11

Menu operation key (remote control) 15

MHL cable 34

MHL connection 44

MHL jack 34

MHL Overloaded (error indication) 155

MHL-compatible mobile device 44

Microphone base 53

, 56

MODE key 15

Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 111

Monaural reception (FM radio) 70

Monaural reception (FM/AM radio) 70

Monitor check 136

MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 136

Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 128

Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 128

Mono (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 128

Mono Movie (sound program) 66

MOVIE (sound program category) 66

MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 66

MULTI CH INPUT jack 14

Multi measurement (YPAO) 55

Multi Zone (Information menu) 134

Multi Zone (Setup menu) 127

Multi-channel analog connection 47

Multiple room playback 91

Multi-zone 91

Multi-zone output 160

MUSIC (sound program category) 67

Music Video (sound program) 66

MUTE key 15

Muting 61

NAS (Network Attached Storage) 46

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 172

NAS connection 46

NAS content playback 84

Network (Information menu) 134

Network (Setup menu) 125

Network Attached Storage (NAS) 46

Network cable 46

Network connection 46

Network information 134

Network Name (Network, Information menu) 134

Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 126

Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 126

No content (error indication) 155

No device (error indication) 155

No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 59

No Front SP (YPAO error message) 59

No MIC (YPAO error message) 59

No R.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 59

No Signal (YPAO error message) 59

No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 59

Noisy (YPAO error message) 59

Normal (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 57

NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 136

Numeric key (remote control) 16

ON SCREEN key 15

OPTICAL jack 34

OPTION key 15

Option menu 99

Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 60

Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133

Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 60

PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 136

Panorama (Sound Program menu) 111

Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 119

PARTY key 16

Party mode 97

Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 129

PC connection 46

PC content playback 84

PHONES jack 11

PHONO jack 13

Playback device connection 41

Playback device operation (remote control) 140

Please wait (error indication) 155

Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 116

Power cable connection 48

Power management 132

Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 131

PRE OUT jack 14

Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 71

Program Service (Radio Data System) 74

Program Type (Radio Data System) 74

Pure Direct 69

PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 69

Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 121

Q factor 119

Radio Data System (FM radio) 74

Radio Data System information 74

Radio Data System tuning 74

Radio Text (Radio Data System) 74

Rear panel (part names and functions) 13

Rear Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 118

Recital/Opera (sound program) 66

Recording device connection 47

RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 137

RemID Mismatch (error indication) 155

REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 135

Remote connection 95

Remote control (part names and functions) 15

Remote control code registration

(playback device) 139

Remote control code registration (TV) 138

Remote Control Code Search 138

, 139

Remote control ID setting 135

Remote control ID setting (remote control) 135

Remote control sensor 10

Remote control sensor setting 135

Remote control signal transmitter (remote control) 15

Remote ID (System, Information menu) 134

REMOTE IN jack 13

Remote Off (error indication) 155

REMOTE OUT jack 13

REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 135

Rename (device name on the remote control) 141

Rename (input name) 105

Rename (network name) 126

Rename (scene name) 108

Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 105

Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 108

Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 80

Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 86

Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 83

Reset (remote control) 144

Reset (Scene menu) 108

Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 122

Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 110

Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 110

Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 110

Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 57

Roleplaying Game (sound program) 66

Room Size (Sound Program menu) 110

Router connection 46

S VIDEO jack 34

Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133

Save (Scene menu) 107

SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 59

Scene configuration 63

SCENE function 62

SCENE link playback 63

Scene menu 106

Sci-Fi (sound program) 66

Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 116

Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 116

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 173

Setup menu 112

Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 130

Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 80

Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 86

Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 83

Signal information 133

SILENT CINEMA 65

Simple play (iPod) 79

Single measurement (YPAO) 53

Size (YPAO measurement result) 57

SLEEP key 16

Sleep timer 16

Sleep timer (Zone2/Zone3/Zone4) 97

Sound (Setup menu) 120

Sound field effect 65

Sound mode selection 64

Sound program 66

, 67

Sound Program menu 109

Speaker (Setup menu) 116

Speaker cable connection 23

Speaker connection 18

SPEAKER IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 135

Speaker impedance 18

Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) 134

Speaker impedance setting 21

, 135

Speaker indicator (front display) 12

Speaker placement 19

Spectacle (sound program) 66

Sports (sound program) 66

Standard (sound program) 66

Standby indicator (front panel) 10

Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 124

Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 125

Station Info (HD Radio™) 72

Station preset (FM/AM radio) 71

Status (Network, Information menu) 134

STEREO (sound program subcategory) 67

Stereo pin cable (RCA cable) 34

Stereo reception (FM radio) 70

Stereo reception (FM/AM radio) 70

STP network cable 46

STRAIGHT (sound mode) 68

Straight decode 68

Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 125

Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 134

Subwoofer 1 (Speaker, Setup menu) 118

Subwoofer 2 (Speaker, Setup menu) 118

Subwoofer connection 23

Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 102

SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 68

Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 117

Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 117

Surround Back Initial Delay

(Sound Program menu) 110

Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 110

Surround Back Room Size

(Sound Program menu) 110

Surround decoder 68

Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 110

Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 110

Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 110

S-video cable 34

S-video connection (video device) 42

SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 102

SWFR Layout (Speaker, Setup menu) 118

System (Information menu) 134

System ID (System, Information menu) 134

Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 131

Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 119

The Bottom Line (sound program) 67

The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 67

Tone Control (Option menu) 100

TONE/BALANCE key 11

TP (Traffic Program) 75

Traffic information (Radio Data System) 75

Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 75

Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 100

Trigger function 48

Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 130

TRIGGER OUT jack 13

Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 130

Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 130

Tuner Freq. Step (System, Information menu) 134

TUNER FRQ STEP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 136

Turntable connection 43

TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 124

TV connection 35

TV connection (ARC-compatible TV) 35

TV connection (HDMI Control-compatible TV) 37

TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 38

TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 39

TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 136

TV Format (System, Information menu) 134

TV operation (remote control) 139

TV operation key (remote control) 15

Unable to play (error indication) 155

USB jack 11

USB mass storage class device 81

USB Overloaded (error indication) 155

USB storage device connection 81

USB storage device content playback 81

User Cancel (YPAO error message) 59

VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 137

Version error (error indication) 155

Video (Setup menu) 122

Video Adjust (Option menu) 102

Video Adjustment (Option menu) 102

VIDEO AUX jack 11

Video device connection 41

VIDEO jack 34

Video Mode (Option menu) 102

Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 122

Video Out (Input menu) 105

Video pin cable 34

Video Signal (Information menu) 133

Video signal flow 159

APPENDIX ➤ Index En 174

Video signal type setting 136

Village Vanguard (sound program) 67

Virtual CINEMA DSP 65

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 65

Voltage selection 48

VOLTAGE SELECTOR 13

Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 127

Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 127

Volume Interlock (Input menu) 105

Volume Trim (Option menu) 101

VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 65

Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 130

Warehouse Loft (sound program) 67

Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 57

Yamaha Parametric room

Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 50

YPAO

(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 50

YPAO error message 59

YPAO MIC jack 11

YPAO microphone 50

YPAO warning message 60

Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 127

Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 128

Zone Rename (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 128

Zone Rename (Zone4 Set, Setup menu) 128

Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 128

Zone Scene Rename (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 128

Zone Scene Rename (Zone4 Set, Setup menu) 128

Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 127

Zone2 speaker connection 32

, 92

Zone3 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 127

Zone3 speaker connection 32

, 92

Zone4 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 128

Documenttranscriptie

AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FEATURES 6 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 50 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 PREPARATIONS 17 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 PLAYBACK 61 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3/CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 5 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 HD Radio™ tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 En 2 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 133 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 134 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . 91 Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Preparing the multi zone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Registering remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 CONFIGURATIONS 104 Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Editing device names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Operating multiple functions at once (macro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Resetting the remote control configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 APPENDIX 147 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 En 3 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below.  Remote control  Batteries (x4) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° *RX-A3030: AAA, LR03, UM-4 RX-A2030: AAA, R03, UM-4  AM antenna 30° Insert the batteries the right way round.  FM antenna *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase.  YPAO microphone  Microphone base (RX-A3030 only)  Power cable • The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-A3030 (U.S.A. model), unless otherwise specified. *Using for angle measurement during YPAO.  CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)  Easy Setup Guide *The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase.  Safety Brochure • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. • This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified. • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. Accessories En 5 FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • iPod/iPhone/iPad . p.77 • USB . p.81 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.84 • Internet radio . p.87 • AirPlay . p.89 Supports 2- to 9-channel (plus rear presence) speaker system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.50 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.65 sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) • Enjoying compressed music with . p.69 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) Control Network contents Speakers iPod/iPhone/iPad • Bi-amp connections, channel expansion (with external power-amp) and multi-zone configurations to enhance your system Audio . p.24 Audio USB device HDMI Control 3D and 4K signals supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video Audio/Video TV BD/DVD player Control AV receiver (the unit) Audio/Video (via HDMI/MHL) Smartphone/Tablet Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.62 TV remote control . p.161 FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 6 Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.41) ❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.70) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets. BD/DVD player Set-top box Game console Camcorder TV ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.35) When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. HDMI Control TV audio ❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.69) ❑ Easy operation and wireless music playback from iPhone or Android device By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the Yamaha website for details. Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the type of an audio input jack to be used for the corresponding input source (p.102). When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry, which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. Video and audio are not synchronized... ❑ Easy operation with a TV screen I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.120). You can navigate through different types of content (such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu. Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.124). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. ❑ Low power consumption I want to change the on-screen menu language... The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption (p.132). Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.49). ❑ Operating external devices with the supplied remote control I want to update the firmware... You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control by registering the remote control codes of the external devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players) (p.138). ❑ Backlight illumination remote control The backlight illumination allows you to easily operate the remote control even in a dark home theater room. Video from external device I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for video and non-HDMI for audio... Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.137). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.146). Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. • Input settings (p.104) • SCENE settings (p.107) • Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.110) • Various function settings (p.113) • Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.133) • System settings (p.135) FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 7 CINEMA DSP The excitement of a concert hall and the powerful sense of being inside a movie - we all want to enjoy these experiences in our own living room. Yamaha has pursued the fulfillment of these desires for more than 20 years, and this fulfillment has now taken shape as the Yamaha AV receivers. What is a sound field? CINEMA DSP/CINEMA DSP 3D We perceive sound from a voice or an instrument not only as the sounds that are heard directly but also as the “reflected” or “reverberant” sound that has been reflected by the walls or ceiling of the building. The character of the reflected and reverberant sound is affected by the shape, size, and material of the building, and all of these sounds taken together are what give us the auditory sensation of being in that specific place. Yamaha has accumulated a massive amount of acoustical data by analyzing the actual sound fields of concert halls and performance spaces around the world. “CINEMA DSP” allows this data to be applied to create sound fields. This unit contains a wide variety of sound programs using CINEMA DSP. By selecting a sound program that is appropriate to the content of the playback source such as movies, music, or games, you can maximize the acoustical effectiveness of that specific content. (For example, a sound program designed for movies can give you the sensation of actually being in that scene.) In addition, the “CINEMA DSP 3D” function uses 3-dimensional sound field data that includes the axis of height, generating an even more realistic sound field with a spatial sense. This unique acoustical character of a specific space is what we call the “sound field”. Conceptual diagram of a concert hall's sound field CINEMA DSP HD3 The included YPAO microphone can be used to analyze the environment so that this information can be used to automatically adjust various settings for the speakers and the sound field. This allows the distinctive character of the content you are hearing to be maximized, and optimizes the effectiveness of Yamaha's sound field generating technology for your specific listening environment. YPAO-R.S.C. In rooms that have not been designed or constructed with acoustics in mind, reflections from the walls or ceiling can cause problems such as a blurred low-frequency range or a smearing of the acoustical image. “YPAO-R.S.C.” is technology that reduces only the unwanted reflections that can be difficult to avoid in a typical home. This corrects the tonal changes and inconsistencies in the sound field that can occur due to speaker placement, thus creating a listening environment comparable to that of a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. Level “CINEMA DSP HD³” is Yamaha's flagship 3D sound field playback technology that takes full advantage of the massive amount of acoustic reflection data included in the sound field data. With support for rear presence speaker output, it delivers more than twice as much capability for generating acoustic reflections as conventional CINEMA DSP 3D, in addition to high-frequency playback capability, delivering an utterly natural and powerful spatial sound field. Capability for reproducing reflections (when the sound program “Hall in Munich” is selected) Level Conceptual diagram of a sound field created by the unit Optimizing speaker settings for the environment (YPAO) CINEMA DSP HD³ CINEMA DSP 3D Time Compensation Time Angle measurement The direction (angle) of the front speakers, surround speakers, and presence speakers as seen from the listening position is measured, and compensation is applied to the sound field in Microphone base order to maximize the effectiveness of the CINEMA DSP sound field. FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 8 Unrivaled audio and video quality High-resolution music enhancer Hi-bit high-sampling extension up to 96 kHz / 24-bit can be applied to lossless 44.1/48 kHz content such as from a CD (2-channel PCM) or a FLAC file for further heightening of the musicality in the original content (p.102) Loudness Before processing Playback bandwidth of a 44.1/48 kHz signal (such as a CD) Expandable to meet diverse needs Support for bi-amp connections and external power amp expansion To obtain even high audio quality, you can connect front speakers that support power amp expansion, or expand your system by adding an external power amp (such as a Hi-Fi amp). For details, refer to “Advanced speaker configuration” (p.24). The best expandability in Yamaha Multi-zone function The multi-zone function (p.91) allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (such as Zone2). (The following shows examples of use.) Enjoying music using speakers in another room While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living room, you can listen to music through the speakers of a different room. By connecting an external power amp, you can enjoy the highest peak of CINEMA DSP - an 11.2-channel 3-dimensional sound field. (Example) Frequency External power amp After processing Study room (such as Zone2) Loudness Playback bandwidth of a 88.2/96 kHz signal Living room (main zone) Enjoying videos using a TV in another room (HDMI connection) Frequency High-quality video processing While enjoying multi-channel playback in your living room, you can enjoy videos and music being input via HDMI on a TV in a different room. From low-quality digital video to BD (Blu-ray disc) images, any content can be played back as a high-quality image (p.122). • Motion adaptive and edge adaptive deinterlacing • Multi-cadence (including 3-2 pull-down) detection Kitchen (such as Zone4) • Up to 6 presets that can be applied separately to each input source You can also apply fine touches such as detail enhancement and edge enhancement. Living room (main zone) FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit En 9 Part names and functions Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 MAIN ZONE PURE DIRECT VOLUME INPUT ON SCREEN OPTION SCENE TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT 1 2 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 3 MULTI ZONE PROGRAM INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING 4 ENTER RETURN ZONE 4 ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA 5V 6 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.124) • Standby Through is enabled (p.125) • Network Standby is enabled (p.126) • An iPod is being charged (p.77) 2.1A VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 7 7 Front panel door For protecting controls and jacks (p.11). 8 VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A 8 Opening the front panel door • To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door. (Be careful not to trap your fingers.) 3 Front display Displays information (p.12). 4 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). 5 PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.69). 6 INPUT knob Selects an input source. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 10 ■ Inside of the front panel door 9 0 AB C ON SCREEN OPTION DE F GH SCENE TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT 1 2 3 K INFO MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING L 4 MULTI ZONE PROGRAM IJ ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA 5V 2.1A M 9 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 0 Menu operations keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. A OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.99). B DISPLAY key Displays status information on the TV (p.98). C TONE/BALANCE key Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.100). Adjusts the right/left channel volume balance for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.97). D STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.68). E PROGRAM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.64). F SCENE keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.62). VIDEO N L O AUDIO R OPTICAL HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A P G MULTI ZONE keys ZONE 2–4 ZONE CONTROL Enables/disables the audio output to each zone (p.96). Changes the zone that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.96). P VIDEO AUX jacks For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.44, 45) or a smartphone (p.44). H INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.98). I MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.71). J FM and AM keys Switch between FM and AM (p.70). K PRESET keys Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.71). L TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.70). M USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.81) or an iPod (p.77). N YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.50). O PHONES jack For connecting headphones. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 11 Front display (indicators) 1 2 3 5 4 6 HD STEREO TUNED PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 9 0 PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR A B Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. IN Lights up when HDMI signals are being input. OUT1/OUT2 Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal. 2 STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. HD (U.S.A. model only) Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station signal. 3 ZONE indicators Lights up when Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 is enabled (p.96). 4 PARTY Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.97) 8 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC 3 1 HDMI 7 B 5 Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.98). 6 MUTE Blinks when audio is muted. 7 Volume indicator Indicates the current volume. 8 ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.100) is working. 9 ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.69) is working. 0 CINEMA DSP indicator (RX-A3030) “CINEMA DSP HD” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.65) is working. “CINEMA DSP !” lights up when CINEMA DSP HD³ is activated. (RX-A3030 U.S.A. model) C A SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. B Cursor indicators Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. C Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) H Surround back speaker (L) J Surround back speaker (R) K Surround back speaker Z Front/rear presence speakers (L) X Front/rear presence speakers (R) C Subwoofer (1) V Subwoofer (2) (RX-A2030) “CINEMA DSP” lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.65) is working. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated. FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 12 Rear panel 1 2 3 456 7 89 0 A B C D E (RX-A3030 U.S.A. model) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) HDMI (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 RS-232C AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB TRIGGER OUT PR C AV 1 A Y GND MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR 1 REMOTE 1 IN OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER 2 IN OUT AV 2 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT 12V ZONE OUT/PRE OUT CENTER R 0.1A 1 2 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL SURROUND SUR. BACK ZONE 2 / SUBWOOFER F.PRESENSE ZONE 3 / R.PRESENSE FRONT (REAR) CENTER SPEAKERS R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE R EXTRA SP2 L CENTER R FRONT L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP R EXTRA SP1 AC IN L (4 RADIO) AM SINGLE 1 PHONO jacks For connecting to a turntable (p.43). 2 DC OUT jack For connecting to an optional accessory. 3 NETWORK jack For connecting to a network (p.46). 4 AV 1–4 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.41). 5 AV OUT jacks For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a VCR) (p.47). 6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (composite video/S-video) jacks For connecting to a TV that supports composite video or S-video and outputting video signals (p.39) or for connecting to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.93). 7 HDMI OUT 1 jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.35). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack. 8 HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.40), or for connecting to an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 or Zone4 (p.94). 9 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–4) jacks For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals (p.41). 0 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.41). * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. B REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.95). C TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.48). D RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details. E VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.48). A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (component video) jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component video and outputting video signals (p.39) or for connecting to a zone video monitor used in Zone2 or Zone3 (p.93). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 13 (RX-A3030 U.S.A. model) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 1 2 ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) HDMI HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 RS-232C AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB TRIGGER OUT PR C AV 1 A Y GND MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR 1 REMOTE 1 IN OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER 2 IN OUT AV 2 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT 12V ZONE OUT/PRE OUT CENTER R 0.1A 1 2 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL SURROUND SUR. BACK ZONE 2 / SUBWOOFER F.PRESENSE ZONE 3 / R.PRESENSE FRONT (REAR) CENTER SPEAKERS R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE R EXTRA SP2 CENTER L R FRONT L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP R EXTRA SP1 AC IN L (4 RADIO) AM * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. SINGLE F G F ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.45). G AUDIO 1–4 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.43). H MULTI CH INPUT jacks For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel output and inputting audio signals (p.47). H I J K I ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks (RX-A3030) For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.92), or for connecting to an external power amplifier for front presence or rear presence channels (p.33). ZONE OUT jacks (RX-A2030) For connecting to an external amplifier used in Zone2 or Zone3 and outputting audio (p.92). L J PRE OUT jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.22) or to an external power amplifier (p.33). K SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.18). L AC IN jack For connecting the supplied power cable (p.48). FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 14 Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 2 SOURCE z key SOURCE RECEIVER Turns on/off an external device. SOURCE/RECEIVER key 3 Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is operated with the remote control (p.140). You can operate the unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external device when this key lights up in green. AV 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 3 Display window Displays remote control information. 4 Input selection keys 4 VOLUME C D TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN 9 E F ENTER RETURN : Turns on/off (standby) the unit. SCENE 7 8 RECEIVER z key AUDIO DISPLAY G 5 SCENE keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT B Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. 0 MODE key Switches the iPod operation modes (p.79). (U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program (p.72). A PRESET keys Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.71). B TV operation keys Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV operations (p.139). C VOLUME keys Adjust the volume. D MUTE key Mutes the audio output. E OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.99). F LIGHT key (RX-A3030 only) Turns on the backlight of the remote control keys for about 10 seconds. G DISPLAY key Displays status information on the TV (p.98). H Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.64). Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.62). 7 A Select an input source for playback. AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks PHONO PHONO jacks MULTI MULTI CH INPUT jacks USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) TUNER FM/AM radio [A], [B], [C] Change the external device to operate with the remote control without switching the input source. 9 Menu operation keys TV VOL TV CH H 6 PROGRAM keys Select a sound program (p.64). 7 External device operation keys Let you play back and perform other operations for external devices (p.140). MUTE 8 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. (RX-A3030) FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 15 ■ Inside of the remote control cover I Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.64). SOURCE RECEIVER J INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.98). K Numeric keys AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. L ZONE key Changes the zone that is controlled by the remote control (p.96). AUDIO M PARTY key Turns on/off the party mode (p.97). N HDMI OUT key SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM 4 Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.61). O Radio keys VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU Operate the FM/AM radio (p.70). MEMORY Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets. FM Switches to FM radio. AM Switches to AM radio. TUN./CH Select the radio frequency. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN P SLEEP key ENTER RETURN I J DISPLAY SUR. MODE DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT K 4 PURE SLEEP DIRECT TV 7 INPUT 10 MUTE L M N Q LEVEL key O R SETUP key Adjusts the volume of each speaker (p.119). Switches the remote control to the setup mode (p.138). TUN./ CH PRESET 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). P Q R • To operate external devices with the remote control, register a remote control code for each device before using (p.138). (RX-A3030) FEATURES ➤ Part names and functions En 16 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Connecting speakers (p.18) Basic speaker configuration (p.19) Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit. Advanced speaker configuration (p.24) Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance the system. 2 Connecting a TV (p.35) Connect a TV to the unit. 3 Connecting playback devices (p.41) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.45) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 5 Connecting to a network (p.46) Connect the unit to a network. 6 Connecting other devices (p.47) Connect external devices such as recording devices. 7 Connecting the power cable (p.48) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.49) Select the desired on-screen menu language. 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.50) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! PREPARATIONS ➤ General setup procedure En 17 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Connecting speakers The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.24). Caution • Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.21). Ideal speaker layout Functions of each speaker Speaker type Abbr. Function Front (L) 1 Front (R) 2 Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals). Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected. Surround back (L) 6 Surround back (R) 7 Front presence (L) E Front presence (R) R Rear presence (L) T Rear presence (R) Y Subwoofer 9 E R 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds). 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 1 9 2 3 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 9 Produce surround back right/left channel sounds. Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP HD³ (RX-A3030) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-A2030) (p.65), the presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room. 4 5 10°~30° Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the room. 10°~30° T • Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout. 6 • When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL” and “SBR” in the diagram). • The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds). Y 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 7 0.3 m (1 ft) or more 1.8 m (5.9 ft) • (RX-A3030 only) The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 18 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Basic speaker configuration ■ Placing speakers in your room Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. ❑ 9.2+2-channel system (using both surround back and rear presence speakers) E R 1 9 E 2 3 R 1 9 4 9 5 T Y 6 ❑ 9.2-channel system (using rear presence speakers) 4 T 2 3 9 5 Y 7 This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents. This speaker system uses the front and rear presence speakers to produce a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. • The surround back speakers and rear presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected sound program (p.65). • (RX-A3030 only) You can make an 11-channel system by using an external power amplifier (p.25). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 19 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ 9.2-channel system (using surround back speakers) E ❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers) R 1 9 2 3 9 4 5 6 7 This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. • (RX-A3030 only) This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field. ❑ 7.1-channel system (using front presence speakers) ❑ 5.1-channel system This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. This speaker system creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents. • (RX-A3030 only) This speaker system creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 20 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ Front 5.1-channel system ■ Setting the speaker impedance Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 1 Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. 2 While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). ❑ 2.1-channel system 3 Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display. SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 4 5 SPEAKERIMP. 8MIN MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. You are now ready to connect the speakers. Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). • Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 21 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Connecting speakers Cables necessary for connection (commercially available) Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. + – Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. + – Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers) Connection diagram Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit. Speakers to be connected Room Speaker type U O3 Speaker system (the number of channels) Abbr. 9+2 9 7 5 2 Front (L) 1 ● ● ● ● ● Front (R) 2 ● ● ● ● ● Center 3 ● ● ● ● Surround (L) 4 ● ● ● *5 Surround (R) 5 ● ● ● *5 Surround back (L) 6 ● *1 *3 Surround back (R) 7 ● *1 *3 Front presence (L) E ● ● *4 *6 Front presence (R) R ● ● *4 *6 Rear presence (L) T ● *2 Rear presence (R) Y ● *2 Power Amp Assign (p.116) U O U C U ZONE OUT/PRE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER 1 2 The unit (rear) FRONT SURROUND ZONE 2 / SUBWOOFER F.PRESENSE SUR. BACK ZONE 3 / R.PRESENSE FRONT (REAR) CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE R EXTRA SP2 CENTER R L FRONT ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP L R EXTRA SP1 L SINGLE Main zone Basic (default) E R 1 9 2 3 9 4 If you have nine speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or rear presence speakers (*2). If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*3) or front presence speakers (*4). If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*5) or front presence speakers (*6). 5 T Y 6 7 • You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. When using 2 subwoofers, configure the “SWFR Layout” setting (p.118) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. • To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an external power amplifier” (p.33). • When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 22 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ Connecting speaker cables Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. b Loosen the speaker terminal. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. d Tighten the terminal. + (red) + b c FR ON T - a d – (black) Using a banana plug (U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only) a Tighten the speaker terminal. b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. a Banana plug + FR ON T b ❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. Audio pin cable PRE OUT (SING LE) (FR ONT) 1 2 SURR UND SUR. BACK (RE SUBW AR) OOFE R CENT ER CENT ER FRO NT PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 23 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Advanced speaker configuration In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.19), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system. Using the four internal amplifiers for front speakers to have more high-quality sounds Bi-amp connection Combining with an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to build an extended system Using the excess internal amplifiers for stereo speakers in another room Power-amp channel expansion (Example) Multi-zone configuration (Example) (Example) External power amplifier Bi-amp connection Zone2 Main zone PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 24 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Available speaker configurations (RX-A3030) Main zone Speaker configuration Output channel (max) Bi-amp Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone 7  Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and multi-zone speakers 7  Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and power-amp channel expansion (for presence channels) Using power-amp channel expansion (for front and/or presence channels) Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and multi-zone speakers 11  External power amplifier (required) Power Amp Assign (p.116) Page 7ch BI-AMP 26 +1 room 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE 26 7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP 27 Front presence Rear presence 11 Rear Presence 9ch +RP 27 11 Front 9ch +FRONT 28 11 Front presence Rear presence 7ch +FP+RP 28 29 9 Front +1 room 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE 7 Front +2 rooms 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE 29 +1 room 7ch +1ZONE 30 9 +1 room 9ch +1ZONE 30 7 +2 rooms 7ch +2ZONE 31 Multi-zone Power Amp Assign (p.116) Page 7ch BI-AMP 26 +1 room 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE 26 29 7 Using multi-zone speakers Multi-zone (RX-A2030) Main zone Speaker configuration Output channel (max) Bi-amp External power amplifier (required) Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone 7  Using a bi-amp connection in the main zone and multi-zone speakers 7  Using power-amp channel expansion (for front channels) and multi-zone speakers 9 Front +1 room 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE 7 Front +2 rooms 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE 29 +1 room 7ch +1ZONE 30 9 +1 room 9ch +1ZONE 30 7 +2 rooms 7ch +2ZONE 31 7 Using multi-zone speakers • When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.116) in the “Setup” menu. • When applying a multi-zone configuration, you can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks. The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the default zone assignments. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 25 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ 7ch BI-AMP ❑ 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE Bi-amp 1 9 Bi-amp 1 2 3 9 9 4 5 2 2 9 3 4 5 6 6 1 7 7 Zone3 Main zone Speaker Connect to Speaker Connect to 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection) 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection) 3 CENTER 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 45 SURROUND 67 SURROUND BACK 67 SURROUND BACK ER (not used) ER (not used) TY (not used) TY (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2 • When Zone3 output is enabled (p.96), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 26 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ 7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP (RX-A3030 only) ❑ 9ch +RP (RX-A3030 only) Bi-amp E R 1 R 2 3 9 1 9 4 Speaker 7 9 4 Y 6 2 3 9 5 T via external amp E via external amp via external amp 5 T via external amp via external amp Connect to Y 6 Speaker 7 Connect to 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP 1 (bi-amp connection) 12 FRONT 3 CENTER 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 45 SURROUND 67 SURROUND BACK 67 SURROUND BACK ER F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier ER EXTRA SP 1 TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 • When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.92). via external amp • When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external amplifier for Zone3 (p.92). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 27 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ 9ch +FRONT (RX-A3030 only) ❑ 7ch +FP+RP (RX-A3030 only) via external amp E R E R via external amp via external amp 1 2 3 9 1 9 4 T Speaker 7 9 4 Y 6 3 9 5 2 5 T via external amp Connect to Y 6 Speaker 7 Connect to 12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier 12 FRONT 3 CENTER 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 45 SURROUND 67 SURROUND BACK 67 SURROUND BACK ER EXTRA SP 1 ER F.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier TY EXTRA SP 2 TY R.PRESENCE (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 • When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting an external amplifier for Zone3 (p.92). via external amp • When this configuration is applied, you cannot utilize the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks for connecting external amplifiers for Zone2 and Zone3 (p.92). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 28 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE ❑ 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE via external amp via external amp E R 1 9 2 1 1 2 9 3 4 9 5 6 1 2 9 3 4 7 5 6 2 Zone2 7 1 Zone3 2 Main zone Main zone Zone3 Speaker Connect to Speaker Connect to 12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier 12 FRONT (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier 3 CENTER 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 45 SURROUND 67 SURROUND BACK 67 SURROUND BACK ER EXTRA SP 1 ER (not used) TY (not used) TY (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2 Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1 Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2 PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 29 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ 7ch +1ZONE ❑ 9ch +1ZONE E 1 9 2 1 4 9 2 1 5 6 7 7 Zone3 Zone2 Main zone Speaker 2 9 3 4 5 6 1 2 9 3 R Main zone Connect to Speaker Connect to 12 FRONT 12 FRONT 3 CENTER 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 45 SURROUND 67 SURROUND BACK 67 SURROUND BACK ER (not used) ER EXTRA SP 1 TY (not used) TY (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1 Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2 • When Zone3 output is enabled (p.96), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 30 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ 7ch +2ZONE 1 9 1 2 9 3 4 5 6 2 Zone2 7 1 2 Main zone Zone3 Speaker Connect to 12 FRONT 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 67 SURROUND BACK ER (not used) TY (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP 1 Zone3 speakers EXTRA SP 2 • When Zone3 output is enabled (p.96), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 31 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections ■ Connecting Zone2/3 speakers When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP 1 terminals. When using Zone2/3 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals. To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.116) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. To utilize the EXTRA SP 1–2 terminals for Zone2/3 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.116) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) The unit (rear) SPEAKERS SPEAKERS R SURROUND BACK ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE L R EXTRA SP2 CENTER L R FRONT L R ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP EXTRA SP1 R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE R EXTRA SP2 L CENTER R FRONT L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP R EXTRA SP1 L L SINGLE SINGLE 1 1 4 1 2 3 2 4 3 9 2 9 5 6 7 Zone2 5 Main zone 1 2 Zone3 • The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP 1 terminals output the same signals. Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. • You can select a zone (Zone2 or Zone3) to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks in “Power Amp Assign” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu. By default, Zone2 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks and Zone3 is assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks. • You can also connect Zone2 and Zone3 speakers using an external amplifier (p.92). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 32 1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Connecting an external power amplifier When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. (Example) Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks RS-232C V4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 Main input jack TRIGGER OUT Caution MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR • To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making connections. IN OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) IN OUT PR 2 PRE OUT MAIN IN 2 12V T 0.1A 1 L L 2 – Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them. – When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. 1 REMOTE 1 3/ NSE FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK (REAR) SUBWOOFER CENTER R SPEAKERS E 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE EXTRA SP2 CENTER L – When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to the pre-main amplifier. R FRONT L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP R FRONT EXTRA SP1 R AC IN Amplifier with volume control bypass (such as A-S2000) L SUR The unit (rear) HDMI AV 2 AV 3 RS-232C AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 /DVD) COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB TRIGGER OUT PR C Y MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR 1 REMOTE 1 IN OUT 2 IN OUT 2 D AV 4 MULTI CH INPUT 12V ZONE OUT/PRE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER 0.1A 1 2 SURROUND SUR. BACK ZONE 2 / SUBWOOFER F.PRESENSE ZONE 3 / R.PRESENSE FRONT (REAR) CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE R EXTRA SP2 CENTER L R FRONT L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP R EXTRA SP1 AC IN L SINGLE 1 23 45 6 The unit (rear) 1 F.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3030 only) Output front presence channel audio signals or Zone2 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.116). 2 R.PRESENCE jacks (RX-A3030 only) Output rear presence channel audio signals or Zone3 audio signals depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.116). 3 FRONT jacks Output front channel sounds. About external power amplifiers We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions. • With unbalanced inputs • With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit) • Output power: about 100 W (6 to 8 ) 4 SURROUND jacks Output surround channel sounds. 5 SUR. BACK jacks Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side). 6 CENTER jack Outputs center channel sounds. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers En 33 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. AV 1 HDMI cable Digital optical cable EN PON COM Component video cable AV 1 A • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. ❑ COAXIAL jacks ❑ S VIDEO jack • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission features. • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos. Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video cable. ❑ HDMI/MHL jack Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. Digital coaxial cable S-video cable ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL cable. Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). MHL cable ❑ VIDEO jacks Stereo pin cable Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. AV 1 Video pin cable • The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL connection” (p.44). PREPARATIONS ➤ Input/output jacks and cables En 34 1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. ■ Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable. The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks available on your TV. Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method. Does your TV support Audio Return Channel (ARC)? Yes • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.124) in the “Setup” menu. • HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack. ■ Connection Method 1 (p.35) • Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC. HDMI OUT 1 jack No HDMI OUT The unit (rear) Does your TV support HDMI Control? 1 2 ARC (ZONE OUT) Yes HDMI ■ Connection Method 2 (p.37) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 (1 BD/D HDMI input (ARC-compatible) PB AV 1 HDMI A No GND ARC AV 2 B Does your TV have an HDMI input jack? Yes AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 HDMI AUDIO 4 R ■ Connection Method 3 (p.38) No ■ Connection Method 4 (p.39) 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL FRONT R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio SURROUND L (4 RADIO) AM TV About HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.161). • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV, regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.159). • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.40). About Audio Return Channel (ARC) ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 35 1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ Necessary settings To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings. 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player). 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of the unit. c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power. d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV. b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. c Press ON SCREEN. ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. OPTION ON SCREEN e Check the following. DISPLAY d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. This completes the necessary settings. If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.37). e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.62), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. g Use the cursor keys to select “On”. h Press ON SCREEN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 36 1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV) ❑ Necessary settings Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters (p.124) in the “Setup” menu. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. 1 After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. 2 Configure the settings of the unit. • HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack. HDMI OUT 1 jack a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. HDMI OUT The unit (rear) 1 2 ARC (ZONE OUT) b Press ON SCREEN. HDMI DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) AV 1 HDMI input (1 BD/D OPTION ON SCREEN MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y PB ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER AV 1 HDMI A GND ENTER AV 2 B AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 HDMI AUDIO 4 RETURN DISPLAY R AUDIO 1 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio SURROUND AUDIO FRONT c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. L L L L R R (4 RADIO) R AM TV 5 OPTICAL OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV, regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.159). • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.40). e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. f Use the cursor keys to select “On”. g Press ON SCREEN. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 37 1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 Configure the settings for HDMI Control. a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player). ■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks) Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). HDMI OUT 1 jack b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices. c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. HDMI OUT The unit (rear) 1 2 ARC (ZONE OUT) HDMI d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. DC OUT 5V 0.5A e Check the following. HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 2 ARC AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. NETWORK 1 PHONO (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 HDMI input (1 BD/D PB AV 1 HDMI A GND AV 2 B AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 HDMI AUDIO 4 R f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. AUDIO 1 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. (2 TV) R ANTENNA This completes the necessary settings. 4 OPTICAL 75Ω FM HD Radio SURROUND AUDIO FRONT L L L L R R (4 RADIO) R AM TV 5 OPTICAL OPTICAL O • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again) the devices. It may solve the problem. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.62), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit. • By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV, regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.159). • If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.62), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.40). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 38 1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks) ❑ S VIDEO connection (with an S-video cable) Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following connections. If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit. MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO) jack The unit (rear) S DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 1 2 (ZONE OUT) ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 S VIDEO AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT (1 BD/DVD) • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. Also, analog videos that can be output to the TV differ according to the “Analog to Analog Conversion” setting in the “Setup” menu. For details, see “Video signal flow” (p.159). Video input (S-video) HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) Y AV 1 A S GND AV 2 B AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) R 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL L 6 COAXIAL • If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4 jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.62), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV). SURROUN R L L R R R ANTENNA 75Ω ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) FM HD Radio (4 RADIO) AM TV 5 OPTICAL MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks The unit (rear) Y MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks PR PB AV 1 2 ARC AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 A (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) Y PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB Y PR C AV 1 A Y MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR Video input (component video) IN AV 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT ZONE OUT/PRE OUT CENTER PRE OUT ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT (SINGLE) COMPONENT VIDEO 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL SURROUND SUR. BACK ZONE 2 / SUBWOOFER F.PRESENSE ZONE 3 / R.PRESENSE FRONT SURROUND PR SUR. BACK Y PB SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE R EXTRA SP2 CE PB L MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack V PR The unit (rear) SPEAKERS R Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) HDMI HDMI OUT 1 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT O Y Video input (S-video) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) PHONO L SINGLE 2 ARC AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 VIDEO MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) Y AV 1 A L L V GND AV 2 B AUDIO 1 R R (2 TV) L AUDIO 2 R TV AUDIO 4 AUDIO AUDIO 1 (2 TV) R 5 OPTICAL AUDIO 3 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL L 6 COAXIAL R SURROUN L L R R OPTICAL R ANTENNA O O 75Ω FM HD Radio (4 RADIO) AM TV 5 OPTICAL AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 39 1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ Connecting another TV or a projector The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the remote control (p.61). HDMI OUT 2 jack HDMI OUT The unit (rear) 1 2 ARC TV (ZONE OUT) HDMI DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 (1 BD/D PB AV 1 A GND AV 2 B AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 HDMI R 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio HDMI input FRONT R SURROUND L HDMI (4 RADIO) AM TV (already connected) Projector • HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack. • If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”, you can connect a video monitor for Zone2 or Zone4 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.94). PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV En 40 1 2 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 Connecting playback devices The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. • Connecting an iPod (p.77) ■ Component video connection Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. • Connecting a USB storage device (p.81) Output jacks on video device Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. • Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than HDMI. • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.129) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C , D ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source. Input jacks on the unit Video Audio Component video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO) AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks The unit (rear) Y PB PR PR PB DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 1 2 (ZONE OUT) ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) Y HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB PR C AV 1 A Video output (component video) GND • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.102) in the “Option” menu. ■ HDMI connection AV 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT ZONE OUT CENTER R PR 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL FRONT R SURROUND L SURROUND SUR. BACK R PB PR PB L Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. Y ANTENNA 75Ω The unit (rear) Y ZONE 2 / SUBWOOFER F.PRESENSE SURROUND BACK FM HD Radio (4 RADIO) AM HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks C C SINGLE COAXIAL HDMI 2 OUT) Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 O (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB TRIG OU PR C Y MULTI CH INPUT REMOTE 1 IN OUT OUT HDMI output 12V ZONE OUT/PRE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) L SUR. BACK ZONE 2 / SUBWOOFER F.PRESENSE ZONE 3 / R.PRESENSE FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK L R R HDMI HDMI SURROUND L R 1 2 FRONT (REAR) SUBWOOFER OPTICAL 2 IN D AV 4 AUDIO 4 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR Video device O HDMI CENTER SPEAKERS URROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE R EXTRA SP2 L CENTER R FRONT L Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3–4 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) SINGLE Video device If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 41 1 2 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9 ■ S-video connection ■ Composite video connection Connect a video device to the unit with an S-video cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Video S-video Video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (S VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (S VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (S VIDEO + AUDIO) The unit (rear) DC OUT 5V 0.5A PHONO NETWORK AV 1 AV 2 Input jacks on the unit Audio Composite video AV 1–4 (S VIDEO) jacks ( 3 NET ) AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) DC OUT 5V 0.5A PHONO AV OUT AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO) AV 1 AV 2 AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks ( 3 NET ) AV 3 AV 4 L R S Video output (composite video) V L 4 OPTICAL AV OUT GND R 3 OPTICAL NETWORK (1 BD/DVD) Video output (S-video) S 2 COAXIAL Digital coaxial The unit (rear) GND 1 COAXIAL Audio VIDEO 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL V 4 OPTICAL S VIDEO ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio ANTENNA (4 RADIO) AM 75Ω C (4 RADIO) AM C C COAXIAL Video device O O L L HD Radio C COAXIAL O FM OPTICAL L L L L R R Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3–4 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks R Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. OPTICAL R R R Video device O Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3–4 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 42 1 2 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) PHONO jacks PHONO Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. Audio output (PHONO) Ground lead GND GND The unit (rear) PHONO L L • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.129) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source. DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK L ( 3 NET ) L HDMI OUT 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) AV OUT AV 1 2 ARC R PHONO R (1 BD/D (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT Y R PB Turntable R AV 1 A GND AV 2 B • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.102) in the “Option” menu. AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 R Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COAXIAL) AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3–4 (OPTICAL) AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL) 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL FRONT R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio SURROUND L (4 RADIO) AM C COAXIAL O Analog stereo Turntable (PHONO) C Audio device O AV 1–4 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO) L L L R R PHONO OPTICAL R Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 (COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. When connecting a turntable • The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer. • Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 43 1 2 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit. Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.77) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.81). Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. ❑ MHL connection Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit. ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN ZONE 3 ZONE 4 ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES YPAO MIC ❑ HDMI connection SILENT CINEMA 5V 2.1A VIDEO L AUDIO R Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with an HDMI cable. RETURN OPTICAL HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A MHL The unit (front) DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA 5V 2.1A VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A MHL output HDMI The unit (front) MHL Mobile device If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the mobile device will be output from the unit. Game console • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.35 to 38). • You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device. • If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device. Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.35 to 38). • You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device. • You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself. • If “Standby Through” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby mode. • The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions. – The unit is turned on. – The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. • When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output from the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT jacks by default. You can change the video out setting in “Video Out” (p.105) in the “Input” menu. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices En 44 1 2 3 Playback device connections 4 FM/AM antenna connections 5 6 7 8 9 ❑ Composite video/analog stereo/digital optical connection Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ZONE 4 Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. ENTER RETURN 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES YPAO MIC • The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase. SILENT CINEMA 5V 2.1A VIDEO V L L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O HDMI/ MHL 5V 1A FM antenna AM antenna The unit (front) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 2 ARC AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) HDMI HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 PHONO (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB PR C AV 1 A Y GND MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR AV 2 B Game console D AV 4 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT ZONE OUT/PRE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SI SURROUND SUR R 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK ZONE 2 / SUBWOOFER F.PRESENSE ZONE 3 / R.PRESENSE FRONT SPEAKERS R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE R EXTRA SP2 L (4 RADIO) AM SINGLE Camcorder The unit (rear) If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO/OPTICAL) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas En 45 1 2 3 4 FM/AM antenna connections 5 Network connections 6 7 8 9 Assembling the AM antenna 5 Connecting to a network Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. Internet Network Attached Storage (NAS) WAN PC LAN Connecting the AM antenna Hold down Insert Modem Release Router • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. Network cable Mobile device (such as iPhone) • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 1 2 ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) HDMI HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB PR C AV 1 A MO Y GND AV 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) L AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT ZONE OUT/PRE OUT CENTER R 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL FRONT R The unit (rear) ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio SURROUND SURROUND L SUR. BACK R ZONE 2 / SUBWOOFER F.PRESENSE SURROUND BACK L ZONE 3 / R.PRESENS ZONE 2 R (4 RADIO) AM • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.125). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.134) in the “Information” menu. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network En 46 1 2 3 4 5 6 Other connections 7 8 9 6 Connecting other devices Connecting recording devices Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks output video/audio signals selected as the input. You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. The unit (rear) • The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. • Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices. ORK HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 AV 4 AV 2 AV 3 (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT AV 1 2 ARC AV 3 Y PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB P C AV 1 A AV OUT jacks Video/audio input AV 2 B AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) The unit (rear) AUDIO 3 3 OPTICAL V 4 OPTICAL AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 SURROUND L SUR. BACK R ZON SUBWOOFER F.PRES SURROUND BACK L MULTI CH INPUT S VIDEO (ZONE OUT) ENNA AV 1 SURROUND 2 ARC (1 BD/DVD) ZON CENTER HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 PHONO MULTI CH INPUT FRONT R NETWORK AUDIO 4 VIDEO AV OUT V DC OUT 5V 0.5A D AV 4 AUDIO 1 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT S Y Radio S Channel output (Center) CENTER (4 RADIO) AM AV 1 A GND SINGLE AV 2 B AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 R 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio L L R R L 6 COAXIAL R SURROUN (Subwoofer) AUDIO AUDIO 4 R (4 RADIO) AM Video/audio recording device FRONT MULTI CH INPUT jacks SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER L (Surround back) R OPTICAL L O O (Surround) Device with analog multi-channel output R L (Front) R If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control, the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using “Video Out” (p.105) in the “Input” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection. • Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker configuration. • When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are not available. PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices En 47 1 2 3 4 5 6 Other connections 7 Power cable connection 8 9 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function 7 Connecting the power cable The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks. The unit (rear) Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. TRIGGER OUT RS-232C AV 6 AV 7 1 TRIGGER OUT OUT The unit (rear) 1 REMOTE 1 2 IN OUT 2 VOLTAGE SELECTOR 2 12V LE) (FRONT) 0.1A 12V 0.1A 1 CK (REAR) SUBWOOFER CENTER RS-232C System connection input 2 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 VOLTAGE SELECTOR R FRONT L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP R EXTRA SP1 220V240V TRIGGER OUT CENTER AC IN OUT PR L 1 REMOTE 1 IN OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER 2 IN OUT 110V120V 2 12V 0.1A 1 2 RESENCE (REAR) CENTER CENTER R L FRONT L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP R EXTRA SP1 AC IN L Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection • You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu. After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) RS-232C AV 6 AV 7 TRIGGER OUT 1 REMOTE 1 OUT 2 IN OUT 2 12V LE) (FRONT) CK SUBWOOFER 0.1A 1 2 (REAR) CENTER CENTER R FRONT L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP R EXTRA SP1 AC IN L To an AC wall outlet PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable En 48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Language setting 9 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z Select the desired on-screen menu language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language 1 2 Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 VOLUME ON SCREEN TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit. 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. • The information on the front display is provided in English only. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language En 49 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. 4 According to your speaker configuration, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.116) in the “Setup” menu. For the basic speaker configuration (p.19): set to “Basic” (default). SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.24): set to the appropriate setting. • The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control) technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. 5 • Please note the following when using YPAO. – Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit. – During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function at night when it may be a nuisance to others. Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears) and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. YPAO MIC jack – During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume. The unit (front) YPAO MIC – During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible. MODE – Do not connect headphones. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH 1 2 3 E R Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit. 1 Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit. Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT 9 4 2 3 5 YPAO microphone 9 Ear height MIN MAX MIN MAX Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. (The microphone direction is not considered.) PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup ❑ Multi Position The following screen appears on the TV. SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE/RECEIVER Selects multi measure or single measure. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Settings • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement. POP-UP/MENU 6 If desired, select the measuring options. Yes Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure). No (default) Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position (single measure). a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” (p.51) or “Angle” (p.52) (RX-A3030 only) and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE • If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate external devices. In this case, press SOURCE/RECEIVER (to light up the key in orange) and then use the cursor keys. TV CH This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the measurement. • If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space. • If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated most frequently. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”: “Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.55) When “Multi Position” is set to “No”: “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.53) PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup Single measure Multi measure (5 listening positions) ❑ Angle (RX-A3030 only) Enables/disables the angle measurement. a d e bac Settings Multi measure Multi measure (1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back) Yes Enables the angle measurement. The unit will measure angle of each speaker at the listening position and correct the speaker parameters so that CINEMA DSP can create more effective sound fields. No (default) Disables the angle measurement. b c a e d c a b d PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 52 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup Measuring at one listening position (single measure) SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Proceed to Step 2. When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for measurement. AV 1 (RX-A3030 [when angle measurement is enabled]) AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] • Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process (about 5 minutes). SCENE 1 2 3 • Move to the corner of the room or leave the room. 4 • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.59) or “Warning messages” (p.60). PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. 2 Perform the angle measurement. a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER. OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement. b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position and set the YPAO microphone to the position “1”. • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE 1 POP-UP/MENU The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. (RX-A2030) TV CH (RX-A3030 [when angle measurement is disabled]) Microphone base FRONT DIRECTION Proceed to Step 3. • We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height. Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place. • Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement finishes. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 53 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement. SOURCE RECEIVER The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle measurement finishes. 4 To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the positions “2” and “3”. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle measurement finishes. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 5 DISPLAY Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT Caution PRESET • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 3 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.57). PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 54 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) SOURCE RECEIVER When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for measurement. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 • Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the measurement process. It takes about 15 minutes to measure 8 listening positions. SCENE 3 • Move to the corner of the room or leave the room. 4 • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.59) or “Warning messages” (p.60). PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU When the measurements at the positions you want to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the following screen appears automatically. (RX-A2030) (RX-A3030 [when angle measurement is disabled]) Proceed to Step 5. VOLUME 1 POP-UP/MENU To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at the first position finishes. PRESET (RX-A3030 [when angle measurement is enabled]) Proceed to Step 4. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 2 Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position and press ENTER. Repeat Step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to 8) have been taken. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 55 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup 4 SOURCE RECEIVER d In the same way, perform the angle measurement for the positions “2” and “3”. Perform the angle measurement. a Use the cursor keys to select “YES” and press ENTER. The following screen appears on the TV when the third angle measurement finishes. Select “NO” to cancel the angle measurement. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] b Place the supplied microphone base at the listening position you will be seated most frequently and set the YPAO microphone to the position “1”. AUDIO SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 VOLUME Microphone base TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 5 FRONT DIRECTION OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.57). • We recommend using a tripod to place the microphone base at ear height. Use the tripod screws to fix the microphone base in place. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. • Do not move the microphone base until the third angle measurement finishes. 6 To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. c Press ENTER to start the first angle measurement. TV CH The following screen appears on the TV when the first angle measurement finishes. The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 56 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup 7 SOURCE RECEIVER Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. Wiring Polarity of each speaker Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the correct polarity (+/-). Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Size Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer) Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. You can check the YPAO measurement results. Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker 1 Level Output level adjustment for each speaker Angle (RX-A3030 only) Angle of each speaker at the listening position AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Caution AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). SCENE 3 4 Checking the measurement results PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Result” and press ENTER. • You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu, which displays the previous measurement results. MODE The following screen appears. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT • A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box. 3 PRESET TV To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen, press RETURN. PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 1 2 3 1 Measurement result items 2 Measurement result details 3 The number of measured positions (when multi measure is performed) PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 57 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments SOURCE RECEIVER When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”, and then “Result” (p.112). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER. 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME ON SCREEN TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 58 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause Remedy E-1: No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. E-2: No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-3: No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected. E-4: SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5: Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6: Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7: No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. E-8: No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9: User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”. E-10: Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-11: No R.PRNS SP One of the rear presence speakers cannot be detected. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 59 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Cause Remedy W-1: Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.57) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable. Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. W-2: Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.57) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. W-3: Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. PREPARATIONS ➤ Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) En 60 PLAYBACK SOURCE RECEIVER Basic playback procedure AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] Input selection keys SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME VOLUME POP-UP/MENU MUTE ON SCREEN 1 Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. Selecting an HDMI output jack 1 Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack. Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output changes. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 OPTION ON SCREEN HDMIOUTSel. OUT1+2 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN SUR. MODE DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.70) HDMI OUT • Playing back iPod music (p.77) • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.81) TUN./ CH PRESET 4 For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. DISPLAY 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT 8 9 PURE SLEEP DIRECT TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP TV 7 INPUT 10 MUTE • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.84) • Listening to Internet radio (p.87) • Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) (p.89) 4 OUT 1+2 Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. OUT 1 Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack. OUT 2 Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks. • You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.62). • When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.) • If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4 (p.129), you can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly. Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.100). On-screen input selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure En 61 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) SOURCE RECEIVER The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source. 1 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 SCENE Press SCENE. The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. VOLUME SCENE (SCENE key) TOP MENU 1 (BD/DVD) 2 (TV) 3 (NET) 4 (RADIO) POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN Input (p.61) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER Audio Select (p.102) Auto Auto — — HDMI Output (p.61) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 Sound Program (p.64) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 9ch Stereo 9ch Stereo Pure Direct Mode (p.121) Auto Auto Auto Auto Enhancer (p.69) Off On On On Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.102) On On On On Input OPTION ON SCREEN HDMI Output DISPLAY MODE Mode CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE • You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.106). On-screen scene selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 62 Configuring scene assignments SOURCE RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and sound program) that you want to assign to a scene. 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 Input selection keys SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 SCENE DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP VOLUME HD 3 TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 3 SCENE1 SETComplete Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene assignments in “Detail” (p.108) in the “Scene” menu. Sound Tone Control, Adaptive DRC Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround Video Video Mode, Video Adjustment Volume Master Volume Lipsync Lipsync, Delay Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR If you want to control the corresponding playback device after selecting the scene, hold down the corresponding SCENE key and input selection key together for more than 3 seconds. Once the setting is completed successfully, “OK” appears in the display window on the remote control. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH • If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see “Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.139) to register it. MUTE • The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.107) in the “Scene” menu. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) En 63 Selecting the sound mode SOURCE RECEIVER The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] AUDIO ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies • MOVIE THEATER category (p.66): Press MOVIE repeatedly. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM 4 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ON SCREEN TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • ENTERTAINMENT category (p.66): Press ENTERTAIN repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback • CLASSICAL category (p.67): Press CLASSICAL repeatedly. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT • LIVE/CLUB category (p.67): Press LIVE/CLUB repeatedly. • STEREO category (p.67): Press STEREO repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback. ❑ Selecting a surround decoder SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP SUR.DECODE ENHANCER ❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode • Press PURE DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.69). ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • Press ENHANCER. This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.69). On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder and press ENTER. • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM. • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the “Sound Program” menu (p.109). • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.12) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information” menu (p.133). • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.68). TUN./ CH ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode • Press STRAIGHT. • This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.68). PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 64 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP HD3/CINEMA DSP 3D) * CINEMA DSP HD³: RX-A3030, CINEMA DSP 3D: RX-A2030 The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. ■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. Sound program category MUSIC DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 CLASSICAL HallinVienna MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Sound program “CINEMA DSP !” (RX-A3030) or “CINEMA DSP n” (RX-A2030) lights up • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.100) in the “Option” menu to “Off”. • The unit creates front Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected. However, we recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the sound fields (and rear presence speakers for further spatial sounds). • (RX-A3030 only) The unit creates rear Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce natural 3-dimensional sound fields when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers. ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 65 ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) ❑ ENTERTAINMENT The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. Recital/Opera This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment. ❑ MOVIE THEATER Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 66 ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) ❑ LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center. Warehouse Loft The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy. Cellar Club Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. ❑ CLASSICAL Hall in Amsterdam The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely. Church in Freiburg Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the church. Church in Royaumont This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ❑ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 9ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. • CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D (p.65) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.65) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo” is selected. PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 67 Enjoying unprocessed playback SOURCE RECEIVER You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) AUDIO When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM 4 VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU ENTER RETURN For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.156). 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. HD 3 STRAIGHT DISPLAY The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP Press STRAIGHT. Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OPTION ON SCREEN ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) VOLUME L C R SL SW1 SR SBL SBR SUR.DECODE ProLogic bPro Logic bPLIIx Movie bPLII Movie MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all sources. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. MODE bPLIIx Music CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT bPLII Music PRESET STRAIGHT TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH • To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.101) in the “Option” menu to a setting other than “Off”. bPLIIx Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for music. bPLII Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music. MUTE SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 HDMI OUT SUR.DECODE • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” (p.117) in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. AM TUN./ CH 4 5 7 8 6 9 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP SLEEP PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 68 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) SOURCE RECEIVER When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 1 Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is enabled or disabled. SCENE 3 PROGRAM 4 DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP VOLUME MUTE Press PURE DIRECT. PUREDIRECT HD 3 TOP MENU MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN • When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. ENTER RETURN – Some settings for the speakers or sound programs DISPLAY – Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus – Using the multi-zone function MODE – Output from the AV OUT jacks CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.102) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default). 1 Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP EnhancerOn HD 3 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR PRESET “ENHANCER” lights up TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL PURE DIRECT TV CH MUTE • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.102) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP ENHANCER TUN./ CH SLEEP PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode En 69 Listening to FM/AM radio SOURCE RECEIVER You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] AUDIO TUNER SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. 4 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press FM or AM to select a band. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP Setting the frequency steps VOLUME MUTE • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. Selecting a frequency for reception FM87.50MHz TOP MENU (Asia and General models only) POP-UP/MENU At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN SUR. MODE DECODE DISPLAY ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT 8 9 PURE SLEEP DIRECT TV VOL TV CH TUN./ CH PRESET 4 7 INPUT 10 MUTE 0 FM AM 1 2 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP Set the unit to standby mode. When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. TUN./CH MAIN ZONE z Numeric keys TV MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR HD 3 STRAIGHT 3 Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUN./CH: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 FM98.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. PROGRAM 3 Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 4 5 TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. • (U.S.A. model only) You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “Audio Mode” (p.103) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.) • (Except for U.S.A. model) You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.103) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 70 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) SOURCE RECEIVER You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX ■ Selecting a preset station Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 TUNER • You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.74, p.76). SCENE 3 PROGRAM 4 Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. ■ Registering a radio station Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.70) to tune into the desired radio station. Preset DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 01:FM98.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR ENTER • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. RETURN • (U.S.A. model only) To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.72) after tuning into the radio station. DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.74, p.76). The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. Preset number Preset SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT MEMORY DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 01:FM98.50MHz PresetOK MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR AM TUN./ CH Numeric keys SLEEP ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered Preset DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 02:Empty FM98.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 71 SOURCE RECEIVER 2 5 6 3 4 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 SCENE 3 PROGRAM 4 TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN (U.S.A. model only) You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8). The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types) from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8). VOLUME MUTE ■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio Technology, visit “http://www.ibiquity.com/”. AV 1 HD Radio™ tuning ENTER 1 Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio program. You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8) directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it). DOCK TAG HD HD2/3 TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP IN OUT 1 OUT 2 HD 3 FM88.9MHz3 WXYZ-FM MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR ■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display. RETURN DISPLAY 1 MODE MODE Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels. PRESET These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as deep cuts into traditional genre. TV PURE DIRECT TV VOL Each time you press the key, the item switches. of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs, HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams. CLASSICAL INPUT Press INFO. DOCK TAG HD TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP IN OUT 1 OUT 2 HD 3 Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio TV CH Info Category stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today’s FM and FM sounds like a CD. MUTE MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Item name About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed. When tuning into an HD Radio station ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP TUN./ CH INFO TUN./CH Numeric keys ENT DOCK TAG HD HD1/3 TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 FM88.9MHz1 WXYZ-FM “HD” lights up FM88.9-1 TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP IN OUT 1 OUT 2 Relative/total program number (when multiple programs are available) SUR. DECODE DOCK TAG HD HD 3 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Absolute program number (when multiple programs are available) WXYZ-FM RhythmandBlu MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Station Info Frequency, station name (call sign) Category Station name (call sign), program category Artist/Song Station name (call sign), artist name/song title Album Station name (call sign), album title DSP Program Frequency, sound program selected on the unit Audio Decoder Frequency, decoder selected on the unit • The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down TUN./CH, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys. • When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.103), you can tune into the analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only. • Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station or period of time. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 72 ■ Holding HD Radio™ information display SOURCE RECEIVER You can hold the HD Radio information currently displayed on the TV (playback screen) and front display by using the hold function. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 When the desired HD Radio information is displayed, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Hold/Unhold” (Hold/Unhold) and press ENTER. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] TUNER SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • The hold function is automatically disabled if the unit is set to standby mode or if another input source or another radio station is selected. 3 “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display. OPTION Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received. 4 TUNED/STEREO indicators 5 Operation menu POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 HD indicator The current information will remain displayed until “Hold/Unhold” is selected again. VOLUME 2 Radio station information Menu Submenu Function FM To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Switches to FM/AM. AM MODE Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency. Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically. Program (+/-) Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. Selects an audio program (when multiple audio programs are available). Memory Registers the selected station as presets. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. Direct Enters a frequency directly. ■ HD Radio™ operation on the TV CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV INPUT TV VOL MUTE You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on the TV. Manual Tuning PURE DIRECT TV CH 1 ❑ Playback screen 1 2 3 4 Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 5 1 HOLD indicator Flashes when the hold function (p.73) is enabled. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 73 ■ Browse screen SOURCE RECEIVER Radio Data System tuning (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 3 AUDIO 2 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information 4 1 Preset station list VOLUME MUTE Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. TOP MENU 1 Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. POP-UP/MENU 2 Preset number OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY SUR. MODE DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. 6 STEREO Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. 2 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. INFO TUN./ CH 5 MOVIE • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.76). 3 Operation menu Menu PRESET 4 Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. STRAIGHT DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 TV 7 INPUT 10 MUTE Auto Preset Automatically registers HD Radio (FM/AM) stations and FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. PURE SLEEP DIRECT 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP Utility Info ProgramType MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Item name About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. Frequency (always displayed) 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1 (HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program, register it manually (p.71). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 FM98.50MHz CLASSICS MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Information Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 74 Operating the radio on the TV SOURCE RECEIVER • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] ■ Receiving traffic information automatically AUDIO TUNER SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. • (U.S.A. model only) See “HD Radio™ operation on the TV” (p.73) to operate the radio on the TV. 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. ■ Playback screen 3 1 2 4 MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. • To cancel the search, press RETURN. • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. Finished DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 TrafficProgram TPFM101.30MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Traffic information station (frequency) 1 Radio station information Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. (U.K. and Europe models only) When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.74), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. 2 Band icon (Except for U.K. and Europe models) Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM. • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. 3 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 4 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 75 Menu SOURCE RECEIVER Submenu Function FM AM (U.K. and Europe models only) Switches to FM/AM. Tuning (+/-) Selects a frequency. Auto (+/-) Selects a radio station automatically. Memory Registers the selected station as presets. Direct Enters a frequency directly. ■ Browse screen 1 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] Manual Tuning AUDIO 3 2 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 1 Preset station list Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. 2 Preset number 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. MODE Menu CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH Utility 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto Preset”. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio En 76 Playing back iPod music You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. Connecting an iPod Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. • To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied) is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack on the front panel. To select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.79). Made for. 1 2 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. The unit (front) PROGRAM iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation) ENTER iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th 5th and 6th generation) RETURN DISPLAY PHONES YPAO MIC iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone SILENT 5V iPad (3rd generation), iPad2, iPad 2.1A (as of June 2013) DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 77 Playback of iPod content SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Browse screen 1 2 3 Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] USB 1 5 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. 4 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.80) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 2 List name OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 3 Contents list Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total MODE • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE TV CH 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.79). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 78 ■ Playback screen SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control (simple play) 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. 2 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.80) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. 3 AUDIO Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to start playback. Operational remote control keys Function Cursor keys Select an item. ENTER Confirms the selection. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. POP-UP/MENU 2 Playback information OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET MODE Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu a Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Submenu Function TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL Play Control Starts playback or stops playback temporarily. s Stops playback. f a Resumes playback from pause. g s Stops playback. h d Stops playback temporarily. j TV CH MUTE External device operation keys d Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). f g h j Skips forward/backward. Searches forward/backward (by holding down). Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 79 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings SOURCE RECEIVER You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN MODE MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. OPTION • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL Shuffle (Shuffle) TV CH MUTE Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music En 80 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device SOURCE RECEIVER You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage device for more information. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 USB • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. • Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use. SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN • The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only). • The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT TV PURE DIRECT INPUT • Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. Playback of USB storage device contents Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. Connecting a USB storage device You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 1 MODE PRESET • You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit. • The unit does not support a USB hub. DISPLAY TV VOL • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. The unit (front) TV CH MUTE PROGRAM ENTER RETURN DISPLAY PHONES YPAO MIC SILENT 5V 2.1A • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. USB storage device DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 81 2 SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AV 1 ■ Browse screen Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 5 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 4 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.83) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 2 List name OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Contents list • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE Menu Function TV CH 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 82 ■ Playback screen SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.83) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT 2 Playback information 3 Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Item 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Shuffle (Shuffle) PRESET TV Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE Play Control Repeat (Repeat) f g Skips forward/backward. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device En 83 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) SOURCE RECEIVER 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 V-AUX 3 4 PHONO TUNER MULTI L USB NET [A] [B] [C] 1 2 Playback of PC music contents You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. AV Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. AUDIO NET SCENE 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.46). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.134) in the “Information” menu. • The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only). 4 • The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC files, and 48 kHz for other files. VOLUME You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. POP-UP/MENU Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH Media sharing setup To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed MUTE 1 2 Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is installed on your PC. In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing and allow media to be shared with the device. • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 84 3 SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX ■ Browse screen 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AV 1 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 5 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 4 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.86) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU 2 List name OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY MODE Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Contents list • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL MUTE Menu Function TV CH 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 85 ■ Playback screen SOURCE RECEIVER ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC music content. 1 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE 4 1 Status indicators VOLUME • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.86) and playback status (such as play/pause). TOP MENU • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu 3 Submenu Function a Resumes playback from pause. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. Shuffle (Shuffle) PRESET TV Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE Play Control Repeat (Repeat) f g Skips forward/backward. Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.106). PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) En 86 Listening to Internet radio SOURCE RECEIVER You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] NET 2 3 • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.46). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.134) in the “Information” menu. Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. SCENE 1 1 • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. 4 • This service may be discontinued without notice. PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU VOLUME POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 87 ■ Browse screen SOURCE RECEIVER 1 2 3 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 2 3 4 MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 4 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 VOLUME 1 Playback indicator 2 List name 2 Playback information Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Contents list OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT TV PURE DIRECT INPUT Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu PRESET MUTE 1 Playback indicator POP-UP/MENU TV VOL 3 5 AUDIO 1 PHONO ■ Playback screen 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu Submenu Function Play Control s Stops playback. Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. TV CH 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback. • Some information may not be available depending on the station. • You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need the unit’s vTuner ID and your e-mail address in order to create your personal account. You can find the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.134) in the “Information” menu. http://yradio.vtuner.com/ PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to Internet radio En 88 Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. iTunes PC 1 Router Starts playback on iTunes or iPod The unit Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears. iTunes (example) iPod (example) Playback starts iPod • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router (p.46). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.134) in the “Information” menu. AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. 2 (as of June 2013) On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. iTunes (example) iPod (example) Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 89 Menu SOURCE RECEIVER • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu. AV 1 2 5 6 3 4 7 V-AUX • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 Play Control • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.105) in the “Input” menu to “Off”. Function a Resumes playback from pause. d Stops playback temporarily. f g Screen Off SCENE 3 Submenu Skips forward/backward. Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 4 Caution PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. VOLUME POP-UP/MENU • You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT • To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in advance. ■ Playback screen 1 2 iTunes (example of English version) 3 PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. Check this box 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) En 90 Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in other rooms (Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4). ■ Enjoying videos/music in other rooms For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can listen to PC music in the study room (Zone2), and another can listen to radio in the guest room (Zone3) and play DVD in the kitchen (Zone4). ❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers You can enjoy videos/music using TVs placed in other rooms. Video (ZONE OUT or HDMI) • Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.160). Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT) • Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements. Multi-zone configuration examples Guest room (Zone2 or Zone3) Living room (main zone) ■ Enjoying music in other rooms You can enjoy music using speakers placed in other rooms. Connections TV (for analog video playback): p.93 TV (for digital video playback): p.94 Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.32 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.92 ❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT) Video/audio (HDMI) Study room (Zone2 and/or Zone3) Living room (main zone) Connections Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.32 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.92 Kitchen (Zone2 or Zone4) Living room (main zone) Connection TV: p.94 PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 91 Preparing the multi zone system ❑ Using an external amplifier Connect the device that will be used in other rooms to the unit. Connect the external amplifier placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier. Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external amplifier. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. The unit (rear) HDMI DMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB PR C ZONE OUT (ZONE 2 or ZONE 3) jacks AV 1 A Y MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR 1 ZONE OUT/PRE OUT IN AV 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 3 ■ Connecting speakers to play back audio Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2 or Zone3. The connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier). AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT ZONE OUT/PRE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) ( SURROUND SUR. BACK SU L R FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK ZONE 2 / SUBWOOFER F.PRESENSE ZONE 3 / R.PRESENSE FRONT ( SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE R EXTRA SP2 L CENTE ZONE 2 / F.PRESENSE ZONE 3 / R.PRESENSE External amplifier Audio input (analog stereo) SINGLE L ❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier R Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 or Zone3 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see “Connecting Zone2/3 speakers” (p.32). AUDIO Zone2 or Zone3 Main zone • (RX-A3030 only) You cannot use an external amplifier for Zone2 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are set to output front presence channel audio in “Power Amp Assign” (p.116) in the “Setup” menu. Also, you cannot use an external amplifier for Zone3 when the ZONE OUT/PRE OUT jacks are configured to output rear presence channel audio. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 92 ■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos ZONE OUT jacks (any of COMPONENT VIDEO, VIDEO, S VIDEO) Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2 or Zone3. Depending on the video input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection methods. Y MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR Video input (any of component video, composite video, S-video) PR PB HDMI HDMI OUT 1 2 ARC AV 1 Y AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB A Y (1 BD/DVD) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT UT COMPONENT VIDEO PR C AV 1 • The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for multi-zone video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable. A Y MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR Y PR IN PB PR AV 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT PB ZONE OUT/PRE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK Y MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL R SURROUND L SURROUND V SUR. BACK ZONE 2 / SUBWOOFER F.PRESENSE ZONE 3 / R.PRESENSE FRONT VIDEO SPEAKERS R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE R EXTRA SP2 CE L V S • On-screen operations are not available for Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”. S VIDEO SINGLE The unit (rear) S Zone2 or Zone3 Main zone To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the video monitor for Zone2 or Zone3, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.128) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone3”. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 93 ■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2 or Zone4. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can enjoy multi-channel playback in another room (Zone4). • When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default). • You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.32). • Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is performed. • To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2 or Zone4, you need to connect the video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.41). – Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input • We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit. – Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”) – Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source • On-screen operations are not available for Zone4. HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack The unit (rear) (Example: using a TV) HDMI input OUT ETWORK HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) 1 2 ARC 2 HDMI 2 AV 3 AV 4 (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 A (1 BD/DVD) PB HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 HDMI PB AV 1 A AV 2 B AV 4 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 5 OPTICAL 6 COAXIAL (2 TV) AXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL AUDIO 3 HD Radio MULTI CH INPUT FRONT R ANTENNA AUDIO 4 SURROUND L SURROUND SUR. BACK R CENTER SUBWOOFE SURROUND BACK (4 RADIO) AM SIN Zone2 or Zone4 (Example: using an AV amplifier) HDMI input HDMI HDMI Main zone Zone4 To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2 or Zone4, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2” or “Zone4”. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 94 ■ Operating the unit from another room (remote connection) You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 using the supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT 1 or REMOTE IN/OUT 2 jacks. Remote connections between Yamaha products An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE • To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a remote control code for each device before using (p.138). REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN IN OUT OUT REMOTE IN/OUT 1–2 jacks The unit (rear) Infrared signal receiver HDMI AV 2 AV 3 MPONENT VIDEO Y AV 3 PR PB AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 REMOTE 1 IN OUT PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER 2 IN OUT D AV 4 12V ZONE OUT/PRE OUT CENTER Yamaha products (up to six, including the unit) TRIG O MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT Y PB PR ULTI CH INPUT AV 7 PR C IN 1 REMOTE OUT IN 2 OUT 1 Remote control 2 ROUND SUR. BACK ZONE 2 / SUBWOOFER F.PRESENSE ZONE 3 / R.PRESENSE FRONT (REAR) CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE R EXTRA SP2 L CENTER R FRONT L Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 SINGLE Infrared signal transmitter Infrared signal receiver External device (such as a CD player) Remote control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 Main zone PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 95 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z 1 AV 1 2 5 6 Controlling Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 3 4 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 Input selection keys 4 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. Press ZONE repeatedly to select a zone. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Each time you press the key, the zone to be operated switches. For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Selected zone (turns off when main zone is selected) • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.70) • Playing back iPod music (p.77) SCENE 3 PROGRAM RECEIVER 4 2 POP-UP/MENU ENTER RETURN MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT PURE SLEEP DIRECT Use the input selection keys to select an input source. TUN./ CH PRESET 4 3 HDMI OUT INFO • Listening to Internet radio (p.87) • Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) (p.89) When zone audio output is enabled, the corresponding zone indicator lights up in the front display. DISPLAY PARTY Press RECEIVER z. Each time you press the key, the selected zone is enabled or disabled. OPTION ON SCREEN ENHANCER • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.84) VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU SUR. MODE DECODE • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.81) • You can also use the web control to control Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4. For details on the web control function, refer to “Supplement for Web Control” on the CD-ROM. • AirPlay is available in Zone2 and Zone3 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. TV 7 INPUT 10 MUTE 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP • Video/audio signals that can be output to each zone vary depending on how you connect the device in each zone to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.160). ZONE • You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. Caution • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 96 SOURCE RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 V-AUX 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU SUR. MODE DECODE MUTE PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT PURE SLEEP DIRECT 4 PARTY 10 MUTE 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP • To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. (Only an input source can be registered for Zone4.) Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds (for Zone2 and Zone3 only) a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be operated. TV 7 INPUT Press PARTY. Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). TUN./ CH PRESET 1 When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. Setting the sleep timer DISPLAY ENHANCER Press SCENE. VOLUME ENTER RETURN The party mode allows you to play back in all zones the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE) SCENE OPTION ON SCREEN The following functions are also available when the zone you want to operate is enabled. Press VOLUME or MUTE. SCENE 4 ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) Adjusting the volume (for Zone2 and Zone3 only) AUDIO 3 ■ Other operations for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 SLEEP • You can select the zones to be included in the party mode in “Party Mode Set” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu. • Zone4 output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone. b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB Adjusting the front speaker balance (for Zone2 and Zone3 only) a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel to select the zone to be operated. b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back videos/audio in multiple rooms (multi-zone) En 97 Viewing the current status SOURCE RECEIVER Switching information on the front display AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Input source group AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 1 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. USB SERVER AirPlay SCENE 3 4 DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PROGRAM VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 ENTER DISPLAY DISPLAY DOCK TAG HD PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP SUR. MODE DECODE ENHANCER PARTY MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT 8 9 PURE SLEEP DIRECT TV VOL TV CH NET RADIO INFO AV1 ProLogic * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. Viewing the status information on the TV MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Information 1 Press DISPLAY. The following information is displayed on the TV. Compressed Music Enhancer/Hi-Res mode status TV 7 INPUT 10 MUTE Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUN./ CH PRESET 4 HD 3 HDMI OUT INFO PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. OPTION RETURN MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC * During simple playback of iPod: DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Item name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Info AudioDecoder Item Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. Input source group Item AV 1–7 V-AUX AUDIO 1–4 PHONO DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER * (U.S.A. model only) HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned into an HD Radio station (p.72). * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.74). Input source/ Party mode status Volume Audio format/ Decoder Sound mode CINEMA DSP status 2 To close the information display, press DISPLAY. PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status En 98 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. Option menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 Option ToneControl MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Front display Item Function Page Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 100 Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC) Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 100 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D) Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 100 Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Lvl) (Dialog Adjust) Dialogue Lift Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. (Dialog Lift) TV screen 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Extended Surround (EXTD Surround) Volume Trim (Volume Trim) 3 4 101 Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. 101 Corrects volume differences between input sources. 101 Subwoofer Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Trim (SW.Trim) 102 Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 102 Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode) Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio). 102 Video Mode (Video Mode) Enables/disables the video signal processing settings configured in the “Setup” menu. 102 Video Adjustment (Video Adjust) Selects a video adjustment setting from presets. 102 Audio Select (Audio Select) Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. 102 Audio Mode (Audio Mode) (U.S.A. model only) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception. 103 • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Input Trim (In.Trim) 101 Enhancer (Enhancer) To exit from the menu, press OPTION. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 99 Item Function Page FM Mode (FM Mode) (Except for U.S.A. model) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. 103 Hold/Unhold (Hold/Unhold) (U.S.A. model only) Enables/disables the hold function when the unit is tuned into an HD Radio station. 73 Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. 75 Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.80), USB storage device (p.83), or media server (p.86). — Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.80), USB storage device (p.83), or media server (p.86). — Default Bypass (Bypass) On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range. Off (Off) (default) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. On Off Input level Volume: high Output level Output level Volume: low Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, 0.5 dB increments Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. Settings ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) ■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC) On Off Input level ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D) Enables/disables CINEMA DSP HD³ (RX-A3030) or CINEMA DSP 3D (RX-A2030) (p.65). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo). Settings • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. On (On) (default) Enables CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D. Off (Off) Disables CINEMA DSP HD³/CINEMA DSP 3D. Adjusting with the front panel controls a Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”. b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 100 ■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust) ■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround) Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds. Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers are used. ❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl) Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting. Setting range 0 to 3 Default 0 Settings Auto (Auto) (default) Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected, the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel. bPLIIx Movie (bPLIIxMo) Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround back speakers are connected. bPLIIx Music (bPLIIxMu) Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two surround back speakers are connected. EX/ES (EX/ES) Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. Off (Off) Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.) ❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. • This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met. – One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 9ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are used. – Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.65) is working. (You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.) • Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing back those sources. Setting range 0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position) Default 0 ■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim) Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume. ❑ Input Trim (In.Trim) Ideal position Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 101 ❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) ■ Video Mode (Video Mode) Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments) settings configured in “Processing” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu. Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Settings Default 0.0 dB ■ Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode. ❑ Enhancer (Enhancer) Processing (Processing) Enables the video signal processing. Direct (Direct) (default) Disables the video signal processing. ■ Video Adjustment (Video Adjust) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.69). Selects a video adjustment setting from presets you have configured in “Adjustment” (p.123) in the “Setup” menu. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.69). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Settings 1 to 6 ■ Audio Select (Audio Select) Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. Default TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On) Others: Off (Off) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Settings • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. ❑ Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode) Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer. Settings Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode. On (On) (default) Enables the high-resolution mode. Auto (Auto) (default) Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order. 1. HDMI input 2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) 3. Analog input (AUDIO) HDMI (HDMI) Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the HDMI jack. Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt) Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack. Analog (Analog) Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 102 ■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode) (U.S.A. model only) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception. • This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM). Settings Auto (Auto) (default) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good. Mono (Mono) Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds. • HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode. ■ FM Mode (FM Mode) (Except for U.S.A. model) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. Settings Stereo (Stereo) (default) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds. Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds. PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) En 103 CONFIGURATIONS Configuring input sources (Input menu) 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the input source settings using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Input menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. Item Function Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 105 Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 105 Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 105 Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 105 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 106 The input source of the unit also changes. • You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. CONFIGURATIONS Page ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 104 ■ Rename/Icon Select ■ Decoder Mode Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w). For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned) Settings Auto (default) Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) ■ Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. Input sources AirPlay Settings 2 3 4 • You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected. Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Limited (default) Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to 0 dB and mute). Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ Video Out Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. Input sources TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 5 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Off Does not output video. AV 1–7, V-AUX Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. Default USB: V-AUX Others: Off • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu) En 105 ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Input source SERVER Settings Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable (default) Allows DMCs to control playback. Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.62) using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the cursor key (q). 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 106 5 6 ■ Load Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting. Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ❑ Device Control Scene menu items Item Function Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. Page 107 Load Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. 107 Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 108 Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 108 ■ Save Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected scene. Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback) Settings Off Disables the SCENE link playback function. HDMI Control Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control. Default SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off • To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.161). • If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.63). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 107 ❑ Detail ■ Rename/Icon Select Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude). For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO). ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). 2 3 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Check or uncheck Choices Input Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. Input (p.61), Audio Select (p.102) HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.61) Mode Sound Program (p.64), Pure Direct Mode (p.121), Enhancer (p.69), Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.102) Sound Tone Control (p.100), Adaptive DRC (p.100) Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.100), Dialogue Lift (p.101), Dialogue Level (p.101), Subwoofer Trim (p.102), Extended Surround (p.101) Video Video Mode (p.122), Video Adjustment (p.102) Volume Master Volume (p.61) Lipsync Lipsync (p.120), Delay (p.120) Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.116), PEQ Select (p.119) • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Default Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Reset Restores the default settings (p.62) for the selected scene. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) En 108 4 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. • To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”. 5 6 3 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and press the cursor key (q). • You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 109 Sound Program menu items • Available items and the default settings vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. ■ Settings for sound programs Item Decode Type Function DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. -6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB) Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to reduce it. Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. 1 ms to 99 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. Function Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. 1.0 s to 5.0 s Higher to enrich the reverberant sound and lower to have clear sound. Reverb Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. 0 ms to 250 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Reverb Level Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 0% to 100% Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and lower to weaken it. Settings bPro Logic*, bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie), bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Selects a surround decoder to be used Music*), in combination with the selected sound bPLIIx Game* (bPLII Game*), program. Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music* (* Available only when “SURROUND DECODER” is selected) Surround Back Initial Delay Item Settings 0 to 10 Higher to enhance the reflectivity, and lower to reduce it. 1 ms to 49 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. 0.1 to 2.0 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 110 The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “9ch Stereo”. Sound program 2ch Stereo The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”. Item Function Settings Direct Selects whether to automatically bypass the DSP circuit when an analog audio source is played back. Auto (default), Off Level Front / Rear Balance Left / Right Balance ■ Settings for decoders Decode Type Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0) Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. Adjusts the right and left volume balance. -5 to +5 (default: 0) Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to enhance the rear side. bPLIIx Music (bPLII Music) -5 to +5 (default: 0) Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to enhance the left side. 9ch Stereo Height Balance Monaural Mix Adjust the height volume balance using the front presence speakers. 0 to 10 (default: 5) Higher to enhance the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. (The front presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.) Enables/disables monaural sound output. Off (default), On Neo:6 Music Item Function Settings Panorama Adjusts the broadening effect of the front sound field. Off (default), On Select “On” to wrap front right/left channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 0 to 7 (default: 3) Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. -3 to +3 (default: 0) Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3) Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). • Available items in “9ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu) En 111 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 112 Setup menu items Menu Item Function Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 50 Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 116 Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 116 Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 116 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 117 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 117 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 117 Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 117 Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. 118 Rear Presence Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected. 118 Subwoofer 1 Subwoofer 2 Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase. 118 SWFR Layout Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used. 118 Extra Bass Auto Setup Configuration Speaker Manual Setup Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. 118 Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 118 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 119 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 119 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 119 Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 120 Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 120 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 120 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 120 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 120 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 121 Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 121 Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 121 VPS (RX-A3030 only) Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers. 121 Lipsync Sound Page CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 113 Menu Item Function Page Analog to Analog Conversion Enables/disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks 122 Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments). 122 Video HDMI HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 124 Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 124 Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 125 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 125 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 126 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 126 Network Name Network Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 126 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 127 Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 127 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 127 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 127 Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output. 128 Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 128 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 128 Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 128 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 128 Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 128 HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 129 Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode for each zone. 129 Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 129 Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 130 Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated. 130 Wallpaper Main Zone Set Zone2 Set Zone3 Set Multi Zone Zone4 Set Display Set Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 130 Trigger Output1 Trigger Mode Trigger Output2 Target Zone Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 130 Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 131 DC OUT Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack. 131 Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 131 Function Memory Guard Power Mode CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 114 Menu Item Function Page Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 132 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 132 Select an on-screen menu language. 132 ECO Language CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 115 Speaker (Manual Setup) Configures the speaker settings manually. ■ Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. The unit has 9 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 11 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system. Settings Basic (default) Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 9-channel plus rear presence speakers) (p.19). 7ch +1ZONE Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone and Zone2 (or Zone3) speakers (p.30). You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default: Zone2). 9ch +1ZONE Select this when you use 9-channel speakers in the main zone and Zone3 (or Zone2) speakers (p.30). You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3). 7ch +2ZONE Select this when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone, plus Zone2 and Zone3 speakers (p.31). You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default: Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3). 9ch +RP (RX-A3030 only) Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.27). 9ch +FRONT (RX-A3030 only) Select this when you use 9-channel speakers plus front channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.28). 7ch +FP+RP (RX-A3030 only) Select this when you use 7-channel speakers, plus front presence and rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.28). 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE Select this when you use 7-channel speakers plus front channel expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone and Zone3 (or Zone2) speakers (p.29). You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3). 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE Select this when you use 5-channel speakers plus front channel expansion using an external amplifier in the main zone, plus Zone2 and Zone3 speakers (p.29). You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 1 jacks (default: Zone2) and EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3). 7ch BI-AMP Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front speakers) (p.26). ■ Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the selected pattern. • Measurement results (Auto Setup) • Power Amp Assign • Configuration • Distance • Level • Parametric EQ Settings Pattern1 (default), Pattern2 • The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Auto Setup” and “Manual Setup” screens. • This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them. ■ Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. Choices Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”. Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 116 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front speakers) in the main zone and Zone3 (or Zone2) speakers (p.26). You can select a zone to be assigned to the EXTRA SP 2 jacks (default: Zone3). (RX-A3030 only) 7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP Select this when you use 7-channel speakers (including bi-amp front speakers), plus front presence and rear presence channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.27). ■ Configuration ❑ Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). ❑ Front ❑ Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Selects the size of the front speakers. Settings Settings Large x1 Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Large x2 Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). Small x2 (default) Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio. • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”. ❑ Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Small (default) Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. • This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 117 ❑ Front Presence ❑ SWFR Layout Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected. Selects a subwoofer layout when 2 subwoofers are used. Settings Settings Use (default) Select this option when front presence speakers are connected. None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected. ❑ Rear Presence Selects whether or not rear presence speakers are connected. Left + Right Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the left and right sides of the room. Front + Rear Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed on the front and rear sides of the room. Monaural x2 (default) Select this option when 2 subwoofers are placed freely. Settings Use Select this option when rear presence speakers are connected. None (default) Select this option when no rear presence speakers are connected. • This setting is not available when “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” is set to “None”. ❑ Extra Bass Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components. • This setting is not available when “Surround” or “Front Presence” is set to “None”. ❑ Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2 Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack and its phase. Settings Off (default) Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components. On Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel low-frequency components. Settings Normal (default) Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Reverse Select this option when a subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. • This setting is not available when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”. Use None Select this option when no subwoofer is connected to the SUBWOOFER 1 or SUBWOOFER 2 jack. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels when both “Subwoofer 1” and “Subwoofer 2” are set to “None”. • When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. ■ Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2 Setting range 0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), 0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments Default 3.00 m (10.0 ft) CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 118 ■ Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Rear Presence L, Rear Presence R, Subwoofer 1, Subwoofer 2 • To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”. • To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.50) to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type. 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Setting range -10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB Adjusting while viewing the front display a Press LEVEL. b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a speaker. c Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the volume of the selected speaker. ■ Parametric EQ Setting range Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB 5 Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select an item. Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Settings Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front speakers. Setting range Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer) Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080 YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Through Does not use the equalizer. Manual 6 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Test Tone • “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have already been saved (p.50). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results. ■ Manual equalizer adjustment 1 2 3 Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Settings Off (default) Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen. Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 119 Sound ❑ Adjustment Configures the audio output settings. Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”. ■ Lipsync Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output. Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) ❑ Delay Enable Default 0 ms Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 Settings Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Enable (default) Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. ❑ Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range Auto (default) Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. • When “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment. ■ Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Settings Maximum (default) Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Minimum/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. ■ Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”. Default +16.5 dB CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 120 ■ Initial Volume ■ VPS Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. (RX-A3030 only) Selects whether to create Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers. When VPS is enabled, the unit creates front VPS when no front presence speakers are connected, and creates rear VPS when front presence speakers are connected but no rear presence speakers (p.65). Settings Off (default) Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.) ■ Pure Direct Mode Settings Off Disables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS). On (default) Enables Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS). Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.69). • Depending on the installation height of the surround speakers, VPS may not be effective. In this case, set “VPS” to “Off”. Settings Auto (default) Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed. Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper. ■ Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. Settings Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically. On (default) Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results and the volume level. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 121 Video ❑ Resolution Configures the video output settings. Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through ■ Analog to Analog Conversion Enables/disables the video conversion (p.159) between the analog video jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO). Settings Off Disables the video conversion between the analog video jacks. On (default) Enables the video conversion between the analog video jacks. Converted video signals are output from the MONITOR OUT jacks only. • This function works only when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.128) is set to “Main” (default) and “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) is set to “Main” (default) or “Zone4”. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. Does not convert the resolution. Auto (default) Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution. 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 4K Output video signals with a selected resolution. (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.) • If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.136) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV normally.) ❑ Aspect Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through (default) Does not convert the aspect ratio. 16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. • This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals. • Only 480i/576i-resolution video signals can be output from the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks (p.159). ■ Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution, aspect ratio and video adjustments). Settings Direct (default) Disables the video signal processing. Processing Enables the video signal processing. Configure the settings in “Resolution”, “Aspect” and “Adjustment”. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce video output delay. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 122 ❑ Adjustment Contrast Configures the video adjustments when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. You can register the video adjustments as presets (up to 6). Adjusts the video contrast. ■ Setup procedure 1 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Setting range -100 to +100 Default 0 Saturation Adjusts the video saturation. Setting range -100 to +100 Default 0 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Detail Enhancement Adjusts the enhancement effect of video details. Setting range 0 to 50 Default 0 Edge Enhancement Adjusts the enhancement effect of video edges. Setting range 0 to 50 Default 0 Brightness Adjusts the video brightness. Setting range -100 to +100 Default 0 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 123 ❑ ARC HDMI Enables/disables ARC (p.35) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Configures the HDMI settings. Settings Off Disables ARC. On (default) Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. ❑ Standby Sync ■ HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.161). Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Settings Off (default) Disables HDMI Control. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto (default) Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. ■ Audio Output • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.161) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. ❑ TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. Settings AUDIO 1–4 Default AUDIO 1 Selects a device to output audio. • The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. • The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) is set to “Main”. ❑ Amp Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to the unit. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. On (default) Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 124 ❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 Network Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT 2 jack. Configures the network settings. Settings Off (default) Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. • The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on. ■ Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Settings ■ IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). ❑ DHCP Select whether to use a DHCP server. Off (default) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Settings Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. On (default) Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). • This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. ■ Manual network settings 1 2 Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER. IP Address Specifies an IP address. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 125 6 7 To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Network Standby Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). Settings Off (default) Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) ■ Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. ❑ Filter Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. Off (default) Disables the MAC address filter. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. ❑ MAC Address 1–10 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. ■ Procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10” and press ENTER. 2 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER. 4 5 6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 126 Multi Zone Configures the multi zone settings. ■ Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set Configures the Zone2 or Zone3 settings. ❑ Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable the volume adjustment for the corresponding zone. Settings ■ Main Zone Set Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. Variable (default) Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 or Zone3 output. • This setting is not available depending on the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.116). Configures the main zone setting. ❑ Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ❑ Max Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB Default +16.5 dB • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. ❑ Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 or Zone3 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 Off (default) Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (Specify a volume level which is lower than the “Max Volume” setting.) Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 127 ❑ Mono ■ Zone4 Set Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 or Zone3 output. Configures the Zone4 settings. Settings ❑ Zone Scene Rename Off (default) Produces stereo sounds in Zone2 or Zone3. On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2 or Zone3. ❑ Zone Scene Rename Changes the scene names (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Procedure 1 2 3 Changes the scene names (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. You can change the scene names in the same manner as “Zone Scene Rename” in “Zone2 Set, Zone3 Set” (p.128). ❑ Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone4) displayed on the front display or TV screen. You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.127). Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. ■ Monitor Out Assign Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used. Settings Main (default), Zone2, Zone3 • To watch videos played back on a video device on the zone video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks with a component video cable. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ❑ Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2 or Zone3) displayed on the front display or TV screen. You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.127). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 128 ■ HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. Function Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. Settings Main (default), Zone2, Zone4 • For details on video/audio signals that can be output to each zone, see “Multi-zone output” (p.160). ❑ Audio Output Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” is set to “Zone2”. On Enables the audio output. Off (default) Disables the audio output (video output only). ■ Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.97) for each zone. Choice Target: Zone2, Target: Zone3, Target: Zone4 Settings Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable (default) Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. ■ Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. ■ Procedure Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2” 1 Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 129 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2 Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input switching. • You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source. ❑ Trigger Mode ■ Display Set Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display. ❑ Dimmer (Front Display) Settings Power (default) The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone”. Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone”. An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source”. Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual”. Adjusts the brightness of the front display. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) Default 0 • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.132) is set to “On”. ❑ Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). Source Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH Settings Settings On (default) Displays short messages on the TV screen. Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen. Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. High (default) Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. ❑ Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. Settings Picture 1 (default), Picture 2, Picture 3 Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Manual Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Choices Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High (default) Transmits the electronic signal. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 130 ❑ Target Zone ■ Memory Guard Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Settings Settings Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone. Zone2 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2. Zone3 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with power status of Zone3. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with input switching in Zone3. Zone4 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with power status of Zone4. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with input switching in Zone4. All (default) When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of any zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in any zone. Off (default) Does not protect the settings. On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. Icon ■ DC OUT Configures the DC OUT jack setting. ❑ Power Mode Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT jack. Settings Continuous (default) Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of the power state (on/standby) of the unit. Main Zone Power Sync. Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is turned on. (This setting may not work properly on some accessories.) CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 131 ECO Language Configures the power supply settings. Select an on-screen menu language. ■ Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. Settings Off 2 hours, 4 hours, 8 hours, 12 hours Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. Settings English (default) English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Default U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours Other models: Off • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. Italian Chinese • The information on the front display is provided in English only. ■ ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Off (default) Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. • The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu) En 132 Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) You can view information about the unit using the TV screen. 1 2 Types of information ■ Audio Signal Displays information about the current audio signal. Press ON SCREEN. Format Audio format of the input signal Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER. Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE). Input Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Dialogue Output 3 The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal The speaker terminals from which signals are output • Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the specifications and settings of the playback device. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type. ■ Video Signal Displays information about the current video signal. HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT jacks (analog) ■ HDMI Monitor 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”. Interface TV interface Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) En 133 ■ Network Displays the network information on the unit. IP Address IP address Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) Subnet Mask Subnet mask Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server 1 2 DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server MAC Address MAC address Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.126) Status The connection status of the NETWORK jack Set the unit to standby mode. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT ■ System Displays the system information on the unit. Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.135) TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.136) Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.135) Tuner Freq. Step (Asia and General models only) The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.136) System ID System ID number Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit PROGRAM 3 4 5 Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. The new settings take effect. • If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.146). ■ Multi Zone Displays information about Zone2, Zone3 and Zone4. Input The input source selected for Zone2, Zone3 or Zone4 Volume The volume for Zone2 or Zone3 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 134 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) Item Function Page SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 135 REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 135 SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 135 TUNER FRQ STEP (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 136 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 136 MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 136 RECOV./BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. 137 INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 137 FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 137 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 137 HD 3 SPEAKERIMP. 8MIN ON (default) Turns on the remote control sensor. OFF Turns off the remote control sensor. Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP 6  MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 8  MIN (default) Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Settings ID1 (default), ID2 PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Settings REMOTECONAMP ID1 Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Settings Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) SPIMP.- MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control. HD 3 DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP REMOTESENSOR ON ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be automatically canceled. 1 2 Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER. PRESET 3 4 Press RECEIVER z and press ENTER. Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2). 5020 CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 135 5 Press ENTER to confirm the setting. Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, “OK” appears in the display window. If “ERROR” appears, registration failed. Repeat from step 3. 6 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 • The registered remote control codes (p.138) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID. Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) MONITORCHECK YES HD 3 TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.122) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different resolution than the detected resolution. Settings (Asia and General models only) DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC YES (default) Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution supported by the TV only.) SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.) Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. • Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”. Settings FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 (default) Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 TVFORMAT NTSC MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings NTSC, PAL Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 136 Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 RECOV./BACKUP BACKUP SPIMP.- MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. ■ Backup/recovery procedure 1 Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the process. Choices BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory. RECOVERY Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when backup has been created). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 FIRMUPDATE USB MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. ■ Firmware update procedure Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. 1 Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices Note • Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored correctly. USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. • The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords). Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 INITIALIZE CANCEL MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.146). Checking the firmware version (VERSION) PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Restores the default settings for the unit. Choices SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations. ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. VERSION x.xx MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. • You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.134) in the “Information” menu. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) En 137 Controlling external devices with the remote control SOURCE RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] AUDIO You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices (such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control code of the external device. You can also use the macro function to sequentially operate multiple functions at once. Registering remote control codes 1 You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have registered its remote control code. Press SETUP. SCENE 1 2 3 ■ Registering the remote control code for a TV 4 SETUP PROGRAM • You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection keys (p.139). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models). VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN 1 • If no operation is performed within 30 seconds, the remote control automatically exits from the setup menu. OPTION ON SCREEN DISPLAY 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. MODE Item name CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT 2 PRESET PRESET PURE DIRECT TV VOL TV CH TV z MUTE SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP TUN./ CH Item Function LEARN Assigns a function to each key by learning the code from other remote controls. 140 PRESET Registers the remote control code for external devices. 138 RENAME Edits the device names or scene names displayed on the remote control’s display window. 141 MACRO Programs macro operations (sequence of control commands). 142 CLEAR Clears the remote control configurations. 144 ERASE Erases a function assigned to each key by learning. 145 EX-IR Extended IR code mode. This feature is for the authorized custom installers only. SETUP Page — Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. TV INPUT Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to find your TV’s remote control code. 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER. PRESET 4 Press TV z and press ENTER. “----” (empty) or code currently registered ---- • You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 138 5 SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 3. AUDIO Input selection keys 6 SCENE 1 2 3 1 Once the remote control code is successfully registered, “OK” appears in the display window. AV 1 Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the 4-digit remote control code and press ENTER. 4 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. • If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If that does not work, try the other codes. 2 VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input source selected on the unit. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN INPUT Switches the video inputs of the TV. MUTE Mutes the audio output of the TV. TV VOL Adjust the volume of the TV. 3 DISPLAY TV operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT TV CH Switch the channels of the TV. TV z Turns on/off the TV. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH TV operation keys MUTE ■ Registering the remote control codes for playback devices ENHANCER PARTY INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 HDMI OUT AM TUN./ CH 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 Numeric keys SLEEP ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP SETUP • Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.) • If you have registered the remote control code for an external device to the [A], [B] or [C] key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching the input source after pressing the key. CONFIGURATIONS Press a corresponding input selection key and press ENTER. For example, press AV1 to set the remote control code for the playback device connected to the AV1 jack. You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are controlled by the remote control, because their remote control codes are assigned to the input selection keys. SUR. DECODE Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “PRESET” and press ENTER. PRESET 4 PRESET Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 2. ❑ TV operations PROGRAM Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM to find the remote control code for your playback device. Code currently registered 5098 5 Use the numeric keys or cursor keys to enter the 4-digit remote control and press ENTER. Once the remote control code is successfully registered, “OK” appears in the display window. If “ERROR” appears, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 3. ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 139 SOURCE RECEIVER SOURCE/RECEIVER AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 6 To set another remote control code, repeat Steps 4 and 5. 7 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. AUDIO • For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to “Configuring scene assignments” (p.63). SCENE 3 PROGRAM ❑ Playback device operations 4 VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU External device operation keys Once you have registered the remote control code for your playback device, you can control it using the following keys after selecting the input source or scene. OPTION ON SCREEN ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY MODE External device operation keys MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET • By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. For example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green. SOURCE z • These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control. Programming from other remote controls (learning) The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work after you register the remote control code, use the learning function to assign a function to each key. 1 Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and press ENTER. Turns on/off the playback device. TV Cursor keys PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH TV operation keys MUTE TV z SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 Menu operation keys Select an item. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. DISPLAY Switches information on the display. MODE Switches between modes. TOP MENU Displays the top menu. POP-UP/MENU Displays the pop-up menu. s Stops playback. d Stops playback temporarily. a Starts playback of the selected song/video. h Searches forward/backward (by holding down). TUN./ CH Numeric keys 7 8 9 10 0 ENT SLEEP LEVEL ZONE SETUP External device operation keys j SETUP LEARN 3 Press one of the following keys depending on the type of your device. For playback device: press the input selection key (corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected). For TV: press TV z. f g Skips forward/backward. Numeric keys Enter numerical values. TV operation keys Control the TV (p.139). CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 140 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 4 5 Note Press ENTER. Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls at each other. b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and press ENTER. AV SOURCE RECEIVER 2 3 4 4 6 f To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. Perform the following steps (a and b) within 10 seconds. a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to assign a function. You can edit the device names or scene names displayed on the remote control’s display window. 1 TV CH For TV: TV operation keys TV operation keys TV z b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is learned until “OK” appears in the display window. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. 2 If “NG” appears, learning has failed. Repeat from Step 4. SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 TUN./ CH 7 Repeat Steps 3 to 6 until all desired operations are learned. 8 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. 8 10 0 9 SLEEP ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP SETUP Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “RENAME” and press ENTER. RENAME 3 Press one of the following keys to select a device or a scene. For playback device: press the input selection key (corresponding to the input jacks where the device is connected). Numeric keys 7 Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys, DISPLAY, MODE, external device operation keys, numeric keys PURE DIRECT TV VOL V-AUX Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER DISPLAY TV MUTE e Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display. Editing device names PRESET INPUT 7 STRAIGHT AUDIO STEREO 6 MOVIE NET ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N 3 LIVE CLUB USB CLASSICAL d Press RECEIVER z. 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart MODE External device operation keys MODE 2 DISPLAY 4 RETURN c Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “LEARN” and press ENTER. External device operation keys OPTION ENTER [C] POP-UP/MENU 3 TOP MENU ON SCREEN [B] VOLUME MUTE MULTI SCENE VOLUME PROGRAM 4 SCENE 3 2 2 MUTE 1 [A] SCENE 1 [C] 5 [B] 1 [A] PHONO TUNER Input selection keys 1 4 NET TUNER 3 USB PROGRAM 2 MULTI a Press SETUP. Remote control of external device AUDIO 1 PHONO • If you press RECEIVER z in Step 3, you can assign functions of an external receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following steps. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions (may be decreased depending on the signals). If “FULL” appears in the display window, clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for the new functions. For TV: press TV z. For AV receiver (the unit): press RECEIVER z. For scene: press one of the SCENE keys. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 141 SOURCE RECEIVER • To edit scene names of each zone, press one of the SCENE keys and press ZONE to select a zone. 4 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 3 PROGRAM 4 The macro function allows you to sequentially operate multiple functions at once. Press ENTER. Use the cursor keys to rename. To locate the position, use the cursor keys (e/r). SCENE To select a character (A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, symbols), use the cursor keys (q/w). SCENE VOLUME MUTE BD/DVD TOP MENU PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 CLASSICAL LIVE 3 CLUB ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 6 STEREO STRAIGHT PURE SLEEP DIRECT Press ENTER to register the new name. Once the new name is successfully registered, “OK” appears in the display window. 7 To edit another device name (or scene name), repeat Steps 3 to 6. 8 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and press ENTER. TUN./ CH PRESET TV 10 MUTE 6 DISPLAY ENHANCER Press SETUP. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 7 INPUT ■ Enabling the macro operations OPTION ENTER 4 For example, when you want to listen to a CD, you can turn on the CD player, select the corresponding input source on the unit and start playback on the CD player sequentially with a single key operation. 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN SUR. MODE DECODE Operating multiple functions at once (macro) 8 9 TV VOL TV CH 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP MACRO 3 SETUP ZONE Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ON” and press ENTER. ON 4 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. “MACRO” lights up (when macro operations are enabled) RECEIVER • To disable the macro operations, select “OFF” in Step 3. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 142 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z SOURCE/RECEIVER By default, the following macro operations are available after pressing a macro operation key when the macro operations are enabled. 3 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “EDIT” and press ENTER. Macro operations AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] Macro operation key 1st command 2nd commend Turns on the unit. (unregistered) Turns on the unit. Selects the corresponding input source. (unregistered for the [A], [B] and [C] keys) EDIT AUDIO Input selection keys RECEIVER z SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM Input selection keys 4 4 “MACRO 1” appears in the display window. VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU ■ Programming macro operations POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY You can program up to 10 remote control commands for each macro operation key. If you press the corresponding macro operation key, the multiple operations will be carried out sequentially according to the programmed remote control commands. Press the macro operation key (RECEIVER z or input selection key) to which macro operations are assigned and press ENTER. MACRO1 5 MODE Press the keys for functions (up to 10) you want to include in the macro operations in sequence. To switch the devices (the unit or external device) to control, press SOURCE/RECEIVER. CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT • Before programming macro operations, you need to register the remote control codes (p.138) or assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.140). PRESET (Example) Programming for aturning on the unit, bselecting “AV1” as the input source, cturning on the DVD player assigned to “AV1” and dturning on the TV TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH TV z MUTE • We do not recommend including continuous operations (such as volume adjustment) in macro operations. 1 SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 2 Press SETUP. a (MACRO 1) Press RECEIVER z. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. b (MACRO 2) Press AV1. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. c (MACRO 3) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select “AV1” and press SOURCE z. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MACRO” and press ENTER. TUN./ CH SLEEP ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP d (MACRO 4) Press SOURCE/RECEIVER repeatedly to select “TV” and press TV z. 6 MACRO To confirm the setting, hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display. If you have programmed 10 functions, “FULL” appears and the setting is confirmed automatically. SETUP 7 CONFIGURATIONS To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 143 SOURCE RECEIVER RECEIVER z AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 V-AUX 3 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] AUDIO Input selection keys Resetting the remote control configurations To apply the selection to a specific key, proceed to Step 4. ■ Clearing the remote control configurations • When “RESET” is selected, all remote control configurations will be cleared. You cannot select a specific key. Proceed to step 5. You can clear remote control configurations by selecting a type of settings or clear all the remote control configurations. 1 SCENE 1 2 3 PROGRAM 4 SCENE VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 2 POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN RETURN Press SETUP. When “LEARN” or “PRESET” is selected: press the input selection key or TV z. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. When “RENAME” is selected: press the input selection key, RECEIVER z, TV z or SCENE. When “MACRO” is selected: press the macro operation key (input selection key or RECEIVER z). Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “CLEAR” and press ENTER. CLEAR DISPLAY 3 LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET Hold down ENTER until “OK” appears on the window display. If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat from Step 2. MODE CLASSICAL Press a key to which the selected process is applied. Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. 5 Cursor keys ENTER ENTER 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the settings to be cleared and press ENTER. 6 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH TV z MUTE PRESET LEARN SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY HDMI OUT INFO MEMORY FM AM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP TUN./ CH Clears the functions learned from other remote controls. PRESET Restores the default remote control code settings. RENAME Restores the default device name settings. MACRO Clears the macro operation settings. RESET Clears all remote control configurations and restores default settings. “ALL” appears in the display window. SETUP ALL To apply the selection to all the corresponding keys, proceed to Step 5. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 144 ■ Erasing a function assigned to each key by learning SOURCE RECEIVER You can erase a function assigned to each key by learning and restore the default key assignments. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 7 3 V-AUX 4 PHONO MULTI USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 AUDIO Input selection keys 1 Perform each of the following steps within 30 seconds. Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens, repeat from Step 1. SCENE 3 PROGRAM 4 2 VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU Press SETUP. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ERASE” and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU OPTION ON SCREEN ERASE Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY 3 MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT Press one of the following keys to select the device for which key assignments will be cleared. For playback device: press the input selection key. For TV: press TV z. PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH TV z MUTE 4 5 Press ENTER. Hold down the key to be reset until “OK” appears on the window display. If “NG” or “ERROR” appears, clearing has failed. Repeat from Step 2. SUR. DECODE ENHANCER PARTY INFO MEMORY FM 1 2 3 HDMI OUT AM 6 Repeat Steps 3 to 5 until all desired key assignments are erased. 7 To exit from the setup menu, press SETUP. TUN./ CH 4 5 7 8 6 9 SLEEP 10 0 ENT LEVEL ZONE SETUP SETUP CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control En 145 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network SOURCE RECEIVER New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 4 PHONO MULTI L USB NET TUNER [A] [B] [C] 1 2 3 • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). PROGRAM MUTE TOP MENU 4 • If the Internet connection speed is slow or if the unit is connected to the wireless network via a wireless network adapter, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, try the firmware update later or use the USB memory device (p.137). VOLUME POP-UP/MENU If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. Note SCENE 3 • If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.134). You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen. OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.137). Information icon A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. MODE CLASSICAL LIVE CLUB ENTERTAIN ENTERTAI T N MOVIE STEREO STRAIGHT PRESET TV PURE DIRECT INPUT TV VOL TV CH MUTE Message System Icon 1 2 Read the on-screen description. To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware via the network En 146 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the speaker settings again (p.50). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.116). Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.120). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.127). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.121). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 or Zone3 (p.127). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during operations... By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.130) in the “Setup” menu to turn off the short messages. I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.131). The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.135). You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.101). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode... I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.161). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, APPENDIX ➤ Frequently asked questions En 147 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.23). The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.132). The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.135). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.23). The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.132). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 148 Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. The remote control is set to control external devices. Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange). The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.135). The remote control is set to control the unit. Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights up in green). The corresponding remote control code is not set properly. Set the remote control code again (p.138). Even if the remote control code is registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control. A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to V-AUX. Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.144). The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable. Directly operate the mobile device itself. The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external device are weak. Replace with new batteries. The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate. Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.140). External devices cannot be controlled using the remote control. The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be controlled using the remote control. Remedy The remote control does not learn new functions. The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with the remote control. Memory capacity is full. Learning is impossible in this case. Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions (p.145). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 149 Audio Problem No sound. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.133). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.120). The volume cannot be increased. A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.133). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.119). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.50) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.117). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.50) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.119). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. The extended surround is disabled. Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used (p.101). The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.118). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.50) or set “Subwoofer 1” or “Subwoofer 2” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.118). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.124). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. No sound is coming from the surround back speaker. No sound is coming from the subwoofer. No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 150 Problem Cause Remedy The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.35). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.124). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.124). Also, enable ARC on the TV. No sound from the Zone2 TV (connected to the unit with HDMI). The audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is disabled. Set “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.129). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.133). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.132). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.94). Noise/hum is heard. The sound is distorted. The sound is interrupted. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 151 Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. The video is interrupted. Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.136). The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.133). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.162). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. (If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone) Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected. Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using (p.61). (If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 or Zone4) HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.94). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 152 FM/AM radio Problem Cause There is multi-path interference. Remedy Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. (U.S.A. model only) Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.103). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. (Except for U.S.A. model) Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.103). Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.70). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. The AM radio signal is weak. Select the station manually (p.70). Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset has been used. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A. model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.71). The unit does not receive HD Radio signals. (U.S.A. model only) The unit is in the monaural reception mode. Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.103). APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 153 USB and network Problem Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The files in the USB device cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.125). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.125). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.84). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.126). The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.84). The files in the PC cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.126). It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.137). The unit does not detect the USB device. The unit does not detect the PC. The Internet radio cannot be played. The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. Firmware update via the network is failed. APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting En 154 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.84). Access error The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.77). Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.46). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. MHL Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile device. Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.135). Remote Off The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off. Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.135). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some reasons. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.84). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. No device Unable to play USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. APPENDIX ➤ Error indications on the front display En 155 Glossary Audio information ■ Audio decoding format Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Pro Logic IIx DTS Express DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Neo:6 DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. Dolby TrueHD FLAC Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. DTS Digital Surround DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS-ES DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 156 Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. ■ Others Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. Lip sync Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. HDMI and video information Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Deep Color Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. MHL MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. This technology achieves more accurate color reproduction than the composite video signal system. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 157 Yamaha technologies CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. CINEMA DSP HD³ The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP HD³ feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without presence speakers. Even if the presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 158 Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. m (solid line) is always available. , (dotted line) is available only when “Analog to Analog Conversion” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On” (default). Video device The unit ■ Video conversion table • You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. HDMI out TV Resolution 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K 480i/576i m m m m m m m m m m m 720p m m m m 1080i m m m m 1080p/ 50, 60 Hz m m m m m m 480p/576p HDMI in HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI in 1080p/24 Hz COMPONENT VIDEO in COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO m m m m m m m m m m COMPONENT 720p VIDEO in m m m m 1080i m m m m 480i/576i COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y 480i/ 576i m S VIDEO VIDEO in VIDEO VIDEO 720p 1080i 1080p 480p/576p m 480i/ 576i 480i/ 576i , , m m m m 1080p S VIDEO in S VIDEO 480p/ 576p m 4K COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO out out COMPONENT VIDEO out S VIDEO out S VIDEO S VIDEO S VIDEO in 480i/576i m m m m m m , m , VIDEO in m m m m m m , , m VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO 480i/576i APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 159 Multi-zone output ■ Audio output ■ Video output Using the unit's internal amplifier (p.32) Out In EXTRA SP 1–2 jacks Zone2 Zone3 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*6) Using an external amplifier (p.92) ZONE OUT jacks Zone2 Zone3 HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack Zone2 (*1) Zone4 (*2) Digital audio (HDMI) m (*3) m (*3) m (*3) Digital audio (COAXIAL/OPTICAL) m (*5) m (*5) m (*5) Analog audio (AUDIO) m m m m m USB (including iPod) m m m m m Network sources m m m m m TUNER m m m m m m (*4) Out In COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO Zone2/3 Zone2/3 Zone2/3 HDMI video Component video Zone2 Zone4 m m m m S-video m Composite video On-screen display (browse/playback) HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*7) m (*8) m (*8) m (*8) m m: Available m: Available *6 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.128) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone3” *7 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” or “Zone4” *8 Not available in Zone3 when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” *1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On) *2 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.129) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone4” *3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected) *4 HDMI audio pass-through (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected) *5 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input APPENDIX ➤ Glossary En 160 (Example) Information on HDMI HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.35) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.41). Operations available from the TV’s remote control Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. • Standby synchronization • Volume control including mute • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device 1 2 • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) HDMI Control Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) Turn off the TV Operations available from the unit’s remote control • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.62) • Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed) • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering remote control codes (p.139) Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.124) in the “Setup” menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and “Standby Sync”). (Example) HDMI Control Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts 3 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 4 5 6 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 161 7 Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. APPENDIX ➤ Information on HDMI En 162 Reference diagram (rear panel) DC OUT 5V 0.5A NETWORK 1 2 ARC PHONO AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) HDMI HDMI OUT ( 3 NET ) (ZONE OUT) MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV OUT Y AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 RS-232C AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) PB COMPONENT VIDEO PR Y AV 3 PB TRIGGER OUT PR C AV 1 A Y GND MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT PB PR 1 REMOTE 1 IN OUT 2 IN OUT AV 2 2 B D AV 4 AUDIO 1 (2 TV) L AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 MULTI CH INPUT 12V ZONE OUT/PRE OUT CENTER PRE OUT (SINGLE) (FRONT) R 0.1A 1 2 1 COAXIAL 2 COAXIAL 3 OPTICAL 4 OPTICAL 5 OPTICAL FRONT 6 COAXIAL SURROUND SUR. BACK ZONE 2 / SUBWOOFER F.PRESENSE ZONE 3 / R.PRESENSE FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK (REAR) SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R ANTENNA 75Ω FM HD Radio SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/R.PRESENCE R EXTRA SP2 L CENTER R FRONT L ZONE 2/ZONE 3/F.PRESENCE/ BI–AMP R EXTRA SP1 AC IN L (4 RADIO) AM SINGLE (RX-A3030 U.S.A. model) • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. APPENDIX ➤ Reference diagram (rear panel) En 163 Trademarks Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United States and/or other countries. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. “Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance. AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. Windows™ Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. Android™ Android is a trademark of Google Inc. Rovi™ This receiver supports network connections. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Rovi Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. APPENDIX ➤ Trademarks En 164 Specifications Input jacks • Analog Audio Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX) MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER) • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) Optical x 4 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1, V-AUX) Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2) • Video Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX) S-video x 4 (AV 1–4) Component x 4 (AV 1–4) • HDMI Input HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*) * V-AUX: MHL input compatible • Others USB x 1 (USB2.0) NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) Output jacks • Analog Audio - Speaker Out x 11 (9 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP 1 L/R*1, EXTRA SP 2 [RX-A3030] - VGA - Pre Out x 11 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, - 480i/60 Hz SURROUND BACK L/R, F.PRESENCE L/R*3, R.PRESENCE L/R*4) - 576i/50 Hz *3 Note: barter to ZONE2 - 480p/60 Hz *4 Note: barter to ZONE3 - 576p/50 Hz [RX-A2030] - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz SURROUND BACK L/R) - ZONE OUT x 2 (ZONE2/ZONE3) • Digital Audio Optical x 1 (AV OUT) • Video MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT - Composite x 1 - S-video x 1 - Component x 1 AV OUT - Composite x 1 - S-video x 1 • HDMI Output HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*5) *5 barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2/ZONE4) Other jacks L/R ) • YPAO MIC x 1 *1 Note: Assignment is possible • REMOTE IN x 2 *2 [ZONE2, ZONE3, F.PRESENCE, BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, Stereo/Front&Rear/Monox2) - Audio x 1 (AV OUT) - 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - Dolby TrueHD - Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital - DTS-HD Master Audio - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio - DTS Express - DTS - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible • Link Function: CEC supported MHL • Video Format (Repeater Mode) - VGA - 480i/60 Hz - 576i/50 Hz • REMOTE OUT x 2 - 480p/60 Hz • TRIGGER OUT x 2 - 576p/50 Hz *2 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, ZONE3, R.PRESENCE] - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • RS-232C x 1 - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • DC OUT x 1 HDMI • HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K - 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Audio Format - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A • Video Format (Repeater Mode) APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 165 TUNER Audio Section • Analog Tuner • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) [U.K. and Europe models] [RX-A3030] FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ) [Other models] Front L/R .......................................................... 150 W+150 W FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) Center...........................................................................150 W • HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER) Surround L/R ................................................... 150 W+150 W Surround Back L/R .......................................... 150 W+150 W USB Front Presence L/R.......................................... 150 W+150 W • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) • Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A Front L/R .......................................................... 165 W+165 W Center...........................................................................165 W Network Surround L/R ................................................... 165 W+165 W • PC Client Function Surround Back L/R .......................................... 165 W+165 W • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 Front Presence L/R.......................................... 165 W+165 W • AirPlay supported [RX-A2030] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ) • Internet Radio Front L/R .......................................................... 140 W+140 W Compatible Decoding Formats Center...........................................................................140 W • Decoding Format - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express - DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 - DTS Digital Surround • Post Decoding Format - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema Surround L/R ................................................... 140 W+140 W • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) [RX-A3030] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Front L/R.................................................................. 185 W/ch Center ..................................................................... 185 W/ch Surround L/R ........................................................... 185 W/ch Surround Back L/R .................................................. 185 W/ch Front Presence L/R.................................................. 185 W/ch (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 ) Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models]....................... 230 W/ch [RX-A2030] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Front L/R.................................................................. 175 W/ch Center ..................................................................... 175 W/ch Surround L/R ........................................................... 175 W/ch Surround Back L/R .................................................. 175 W/ch Front Presence L/R.................................................. 175 W/ch (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 ) Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models]....................... 220 W/ch • Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven) Surround Back L/R .......................................... 140 W+140 W (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ) Front Presence L/R.......................................... 140 W+140 W [China, Korea, Asia and General models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) [RX-A3030] Front L/R .......................................................... 155 W+155 W Front L/R.................................................................. 230 W/ch Center...........................................................................155 W Center ..................................................................... 230 W/ch Surround L/R ................................................... 155 W+155 W Surround L/R ........................................................... 230 W/ch Surround Back L/R .......................................... 155 W+155 W Surround Back L/R .................................................. 230 W/ch Front Presence L/R.......................................... 155 W+155 W Front Presence L/R.................................................. 230 W/ch [RX-A2030] Front L/R.................................................................. 220 W/ch Center ..................................................................... 220 W/ch Surround L/R ........................................................... 220 W/ch Surround Back L/R .................................................. 220 W/ch Front Presence L/R.................................................. 220 W/ch • Dynamic Power (IHF) [RX-A3030] Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )................................ 175/220/295/410 W [RX-A2030] Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )................................ 165/210/285/405 W APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 166 • Damping Factor Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ................................3.5 mV/47 k AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ).......................200 mV/47 k • Maximum Input Signal • Volume Control Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) Zone2/Zone3 ............ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) ........................................................... 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB • Tone Control Characteristics Main Zone Bass Boost/Cut......................... ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step) PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD)............................... 60 mV or more Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step) • Output Level / Output Impedance AV OUT ..............................................................200 mV/1.2 k HEADPHONE OUT .............................................150 mV/100  PRE OUT SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ........................................1.0 V/1.2 k Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) ............................1.0 V/1.2 k ZONE OUT.............................................................1.0 V/1.2 k • Frequency Response AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ............................... +0/-3 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz)..........................................0±0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to AV OUT ..............................................0.02% or less MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 ) .............................................................................0.04% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO to AV OUT (Input Shorted 5 mV) Treble Turnover...........................................................3.5 kHz Zone2/Zone3 Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step) Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut ........................... ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step) Treble Turnover...........................................................3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small) [Asia and General models] ...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] ..................... 72 dB/70 dB HD [U.S.A. model] ...........................................................80 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model] ........................0.3%/0.5% HD [U.S.A. model] .......................................................... 0.03% Video Section AM section • Video Signal Type • Tuning Range [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]................ NTSC [U.S.A. and Canada models]...................530 kHz to 1710 kHz [Other models] ................................................................... PAL [Asia and General models] ......530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) ..................... NTSC/PAL [Other models] .........................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz • Video Signal Level S-video AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV) Y ......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75  ..........................................................................100 dB or more C (NTSC) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] .................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75  C (PAL) [Other models] ................................... 0.3 Vp-p/75  Component PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ... 60 dB/55 dB or more [U.S.A. and Canada models].............. 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz • Antenna Input................................................ 75  unbalanced [Other models]....................................................81 dB or more • Channel Separation • Tuning Range L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct. Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75  Front L/R (Speaker Out)......................................150 µV or less FM Section ................................................................................. 12 dB/oct. [U.S.A., Canada, China and General models] ...86 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) • Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off) Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) Y ......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75  Pb/Pr................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75  General • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models].......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General model] ............ AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model]............................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] .............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia model].................................... AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 5.1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ................................................................. 60 dB/45 dB or more • Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) .......................................................................1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)..... 60 dB or more APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 167 • Power Consumption [U.S.A. model] .................................................... 490 W/620 VA [Canada model].................................................. 400 W/510 VA [Korea model]................................................................. 390 W [Other models]................................................................ 490 W • Standby Power Consumption HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off [General model]...............................................0.35 W (Typical) [Other models]...................................................0.3 W (Typical) HDMI Control On, Standby Through On............5.0 W (Typical) HDMI Control Off, Standby Through On (AV 1, No Signals) ...........................................................................4.2 W (Typical) Network Standby On .........................................2.2 W (Typical) • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models]........................................... 1210 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) ...................... 435 x 192 x 467 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/2” x 18-3/8”) * Including legs and protrusions • Weight [RX-A3030] [China, U.K. and Europe models] ............. 19.9 kg (43.9 lbs) [Other models]........................................... 18.2 kg (40.1 lbs) [RX-A2030] ................................................... 17.1 kg (37.7 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. APPENDIX ➤ Specifications En 168 Index Symbols Exclamation mark (!) Lock icon (o) 131 146 9ch +RP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 9ch +RP (speaker configuration) 27 9ch Stereo (sound program) 67 Audio Select (Option menu) 102 Audio Signal (Information menu) 133 Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 132 Auto Preset (FM radio) 76 Auto Preset (HD Radio™) 74 Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 50 Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 120 Automatic speaker setting optimization 50 Automatic station preset (FM radio) 76 Automatic station preset (HD Radio™) 74 AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 132 AV OUT jack 13 116 Numerics A 16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 122 2.1-channel system 21 2ch Stereo (sound program) 67 3.1-channel system 21 4K signal (video signal resolution) 162 5.1-channel system 20, 21 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116 5ch +FRONT+2ZONE (speaker configuration) 29 7.1-channel system 20 7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116 7ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 30 7ch +2ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116 7ch +2ZONE (speaker configuration) 31 7ch +FP+RP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116 7ch +FP+RP (speaker configuration) 28 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116 7ch +FRONT+1ZONE (speaker configuration) 29 7ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116 7ch BI-AMP (speaker configuration) 26 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 117 7ch BI-AMP +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 26 7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 117 7ch BI-AMP +FP+RP (speaker configuration) 27 9.2+1-channel system 19 9.2-channel system 19, 20 9ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116 9ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 30 9ch +FRONT (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 116 9ch +FRONT (speaker configuration) 28 Access denied (error indication) 155 Access error (error indication) 155 Action Game (sound program) 66 Adaptive DRC (Option menu) 100 Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu) 121 Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 120 Adjustment (Video Mode, Setup menu) 123 ADVANCED SETUP menu 134 Advanced speaker configuration 24 Adventure (sound program) 66 AirPlay 89 Album (HD Radio™) 72 AM antenna connection 45 AM radio listening 70 Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 124 Analog to Analog Conversion (Video, Setup menu) 122 Angle (YPAO measurement result) 57 Angle measurement (YPAO) 53, 56 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 35 ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 124 Artist/Song (HD Radio™) 72 Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 122 Audio Decoder (front display information) 98 Audio device connection 43 Audio file format (PC/NAS) 84 Audio file format (USB storage device) 81 AUDIO jack 34 Audio Mode (Option menu) 103 Audio Output (HDMI OUT2 Assign, Setup menu) Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 124 Audio program selection (HD Radio™) 72 Audio Return Channel (ARC) 35 B Backup/recovery of the settings 137 Banana plug 23 Basic playback operation 61 Basic speaker configuration 19 Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 100 Bi-amp speaker connection 32 Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133 Bitstream 162 Brightness (Video Mode, Setup menu) 123 C 129 CAT-5 cable 46 Category (HD Radio™) 72 Cellar Club (sound program) 67 Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 117 Center Image (Sound Program menu) 111 Center Width (Sound Program menu) 111 Chamber (sound program) 67 Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133 Check SP Wires (error indication) 155 Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 59 Church in Freiburg (sound program) 67 Church in Royaumont (sound program) 67 CINEMA DSP 3D 65 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 169 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) 100 CINEMA DSP HD³ 65 CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 67 Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 76 Clear Preset (HD Radio™) 74 Clearing (remote control) 144 Clock Time (Radio Data System) 74 COAXIAL jack 34 Component video cable 34 Component video connection (video device) 41 COMPONENT VIDEO jack 34 Composite video connection (video device) 42 Compressed Music Enhancer 69 Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 117 Contrast (Video Mode, Setup menu) 123 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 50 D DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 131 DC OUT jack 13 Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 110 Decoder Mode (Input menu) 105 Decoder Off (front display information) 98 Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 125 Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 134 Default setting restoration 137 Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 120 Detail (Load, Scene menu) 108 Detail Enhancement (Video Mode, Setup menu) 123 Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 107 DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 125 Dialog Adjust (Option menu) 101 Dialog Lift (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 101 Dialog Lvl (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 101 Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133 Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) 101 Dialogue Level (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 101 Dialogue Lift (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 101 Dialogue normalization level 133 Digital coaxial cable 34 Digital Media Controller (DMC) 106 Digital optical cable 34 Dimension (Sound Program menu) 111 Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 130 Direct (Sound Program menu) 111 Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 156 DISPLAY key 15 Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 130 Display window (remote control) 15 Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 118 Distance (YPAO measurement result) 57 DLNA 84 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 106 DMC Control (Input menu) 106 DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 125 DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 134 Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 101 Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 68 Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 68 Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 68 Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 68 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game (surround decoder) 68 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 101 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (surround decoder) 68 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 101 Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (surround decoder) 68 Drama (sound program) 66 DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 156 DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 110 DSP Program (front display information) 98 DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 68 DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder) 68 DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 101 Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu) 120 E ECO (Setup menu) 132 ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 132 Edge Enhancement (Video Mode, Setup menu) Enhancer (Option menu) 102 123 ENHANCER (sound mode) 69 ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 66 Erasing (remote control) 145 Error indication (front display) 155 EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 101 EXTD Surround (Option menu) 101 Extended Surround (Option menu) 101 External device control (remote control) 138 External device operation key (remote control) 15 External power amplifier 33, 92 Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 118 F Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 126 FIRM UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 137 Firmware update 137 Firmware update (network) 137, 146 Firmware update (USB) 137 Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 134 Firmware version check 137 FM antenna connection 45 FM Mode (Option menu) 103 FM radio listening 70 FM/AM radio tuning 70 Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133 Frequency (FM/AM radio) 70 Frequency step setting 70, 136 Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 117 Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 111 Front display (part names and functions) 12 Front display brightness 130 Front display information 98 Front panel (part names and functions) 10 Front panel door (front panel) 10 Front panel jack connection 44 Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 118 Function (Setup menu) 129 G GND terminal 43 Ground lead 43 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 170 H Hall in Amsterdam (sound program) 67 Hall in Munich (sound program) 67 Hall in Vienna (sound program) 67 HD Radio™ information 72 HD Radio™ tuning 72 HDMI (Setup menu) 124 HDMI cable 34 HDMI connection (video device) 41 HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 124 HDMI jack 34 HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 133 HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 125 HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 125 HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 129 HDMI output selection 61 HDMI signal compatibility 162 Headphones 65 Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 111 High definition audio 162 High speed HDMI cable 34 Hi-Res Mode (Enhancer, Option menu) 102 Hold/Unhold (HD Radio™, Option menu) 73 I In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 101 Indicator (part names and functions) 12 INFO key 11, 16 Information display (front display) 12 Information menu 133 Information switching (front display) 98 Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 110 Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 121 Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 127 Initial Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 127 INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 137 Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133 Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 129 Input jack assignment 129 Input menu 104 Input selection key (remote control) 15 Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 101 Internal Error (error indication) 155 Internal Error (YPAO error message) 59 Internet radio listening 87 IP Address (Network, Information menu) 134 IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 125 iPod charge 77 iPod connection 77 iPod content playback 78 iPod content playback (AirPlay) 89 iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 89 L Language (Setup menu) 132 Learning (remote control) 140 Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 111 Level (Sound Program menu) 111 Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 119 Level (YPAO measurement result) 57 Level Error (YPAO warning message) 60 LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 157 LIGHT key 15 Lipsync 157 Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 120 LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 67 Liveness (Sound Program menu) 110 Load (Scene menu) 107 Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 157 M MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 126 MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 134 MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 126 Macro (remote control) 142 Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 127 Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 116 Manual speaker configuration 116 Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 71 Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 120 Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 127 Max Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 127 Measurement result (YPAO) 57 Media sharing setup 84 Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 131 Menu language selection 49 Menu operation key (front panel) 11 Menu operation key (remote control) 15 MHL cable 34 MHL connection 44 MHL jack 34 MHL Overloaded (error indication) 155 MHL-compatible mobile device 44 Microphone base 53, 56 MODE key 15 Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 111 Monaural reception (FM radio) 70 Monaural reception (FM/AM radio) 70 Monitor check 136 MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 136 Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 128 Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 128 Mono (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 128 Mono Movie (sound program) 66 MOVIE (sound program category) 66 MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 66 MULTI CH INPUT jack 14 Multi measurement (YPAO) 55 Multi Zone (Information menu) 134 Multi Zone (Setup menu) 127 Multi-channel analog connection 47 Multiple room playback 91 Multi-zone 91 Multi-zone output 160 MUSIC (sound program category) 67 Music Video (sound program) 66 MUTE key 15 Muting 61 N NAS (Network Attached Storage) 46 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 171 NAS connection 46 NAS content playback 84 Network (Information menu) 134 Network (Setup menu) 125 Network Attached Storage (NAS) 46 Network cable 46 Network connection 46 Network information 134 Network Name (Network, Information menu) 134 Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 126 Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 126 No content (error indication) 155 No device (error indication) 155 No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 59 No Front SP (YPAO error message) 59 No MIC (YPAO error message) 59 No R.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 59 No Signal (YPAO error message) 59 No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 59 Noisy (YPAO error message) 59 Normal (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 57 NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 136 Numeric key (remote control) 16 O ON SCREEN key 15 OPTICAL jack 34 OPTION key 15 Option menu 99 Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 60 Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133 Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 60 P PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 136 Panorama (Sound Program menu) 111 Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 119 PARTY key 16 Party mode 97 Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 129 PC connection 46 PC content playback 84 PHONES jack 11 PHONO jack 13 Playback device connection 41 Playback device operation (remote control) 140 Please wait (error indication) 155 Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 116 Power cable connection 48 Power management 132 Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 131 PRE OUT jack 14 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 71 Program Service (Radio Data System) 74 Program Type (Radio Data System) 74 Pure Direct 69 PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 69 Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 121 Q Q factor 119 R Radio Data System (FM radio) 74 Radio Data System information 74 Radio Data System tuning 74 Radio Text (Radio Data System) 74 Rear panel (part names and functions) 13 Rear Presence (Speaker, Setup menu) 118 Recital/Opera (sound program) 66 Recording device connection 47 RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 137 RemID Mismatch (error indication) 155 REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 135 Remote connection 95 Remote control (part names and functions) 15 Remote control code registration (playback device) 139 Remote control code registration (TV) 138 Remote Control Code Search 138, 139 Remote control ID setting 135 Remote control ID setting (remote control) 135 Remote control sensor 10 Remote control sensor setting 135 Remote control signal transmitter (remote control) 15 Remote ID (System, Information menu) 134 REMOTE IN jack 13 Remote Off (error indication) 155 REMOTE OUT jack 13 REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 135 Rename (device name on the remote control) 141 Rename (input name) 105 Rename (network name) 126 Rename (scene name) 108 Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 105 Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 108 Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 80 Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 86 Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 83 Reset (remote control) 144 Reset (Scene menu) 108 Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 122 Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 110 Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 110 Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 110 Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 57 Roleplaying Game (sound program) 66 Room Size (Sound Program menu) 110 Router connection 46 S S VIDEO jack 34 Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 133 Save (Scene menu) 107 SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 59 Scene configuration 63 SCENE function 62 SCENE link playback 63 Scene menu 106 Sci-Fi (sound program) 66 Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 116 Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 116 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 172 Setup menu 112 Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 130 Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 80 Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 86 Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 83 Signal information 133 SILENT CINEMA 65 Simple play (iPod) 79 Single measurement (YPAO) 53 Size (YPAO measurement result) 57 SLEEP key 16 Sleep timer 16 Sleep timer (Zone2/Zone3/Zone4) 97 Sound (Setup menu) 120 Sound field effect 65 Sound mode selection 64 Sound program 66, 67 Sound Program menu 109 Speaker (Setup menu) 116 Speaker cable connection 23 Speaker connection 18 SPEAKER IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 135 Speaker impedance 18 Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) 134 Speaker impedance setting 21, 135 Speaker indicator (front display) 12 Speaker placement 19 Spectacle (sound program) 66 Sports (sound program) 66 Standard (sound program) 66 Standby indicator (front panel) 10 Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 124 Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 125 Station Info (HD Radio™) 72 Station preset (FM/AM radio) 71 Status (Network, Information menu) 134 STEREO (sound program subcategory) 67 Stereo pin cable (RCA cable) 34 Stereo reception (FM radio) 70 Stereo reception (FM/AM radio) 70 STP network cable 46 STRAIGHT (sound mode) 68 Straight decode 68 Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 125 Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 134 Subwoofer 1 (Speaker, Setup menu) 118 Subwoofer 2 (Speaker, Setup menu) 118 Subwoofer connection 23 Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 102 SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 68 Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 117 Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 117 Surround Back Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 110 Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 110 Surround Back Room Size (Sound Program menu) 110 Surround decoder 68 Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 110 Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 110 Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 110 S-video cable 34 S-video connection (video device) 42 SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 102 SWFR Layout (Speaker, Setup menu) 118 System (Information menu) 134 System ID (System, Information menu) 134 T Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 131 Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 119 The Bottom Line (sound program) 67 The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 67 Tone Control (Option menu) 100 TONE/BALANCE key 11 TP (Traffic Program) 75 Traffic information (Radio Data System) 75 Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 75 Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 100 Trigger function 48 Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 130 TRIGGER OUT jack 13 Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 130 Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 130 Tuner Freq. Step (System, Information menu) 134 TUNER FRQ STEP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 136 Turntable connection 43 TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 124 TV connection 35 TV connection (ARC-compatible TV) 35 TV connection (HDMI Control-compatible TV) 37 TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 38 TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 39 TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 136 TV Format (System, Information menu) 134 TV operation (remote control) 139 TV operation key (remote control) 15 U Unable to play (error indication) 155 USB jack 11 USB mass storage class device 81 USB Overloaded (error indication) 155 USB storage device connection 81 USB storage device content playback 81 User Cancel (YPAO error message) 59 V VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 137 Version error (error indication) 155 Video (Setup menu) 122 Video Adjust (Option menu) 102 Video Adjustment (Option menu) 102 VIDEO AUX jack 11 Video device connection 41 VIDEO jack 34 Video Mode (Option menu) 102 Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 122 Video Out (Input menu) 105 Video pin cable 34 Video Signal (Information menu) 133 Video signal flow 159 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 173 Video signal type setting 136 Village Vanguard (sound program) 67 Virtual CINEMA DSP 65 Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 65 Voltage selection 48 VOLTAGE SELECTOR 13 Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 127 Volume (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 127 Volume Interlock (Input menu) 105 Volume Trim (Option menu) 101 VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 65 W Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 130 Warehouse Loft (sound program) 67 Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 57 Y Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 50 YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) YPAO error message 59 YPAO MIC jack 11 YPAO microphone 50 YPAO warning message 60 50 Z Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 127 Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 128 Zone Rename (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 128 Zone Rename (Zone4 Set, Setup menu) 128 Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 128 Zone Scene Rename (Zone3 Set, Setup menu) 128 Zone Scene Rename (Zone4 Set, Setup menu) 128 Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 127 Zone2 speaker connection 32, 92 Zone3 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 127 Zone3 speaker connection 32, 92 Zone4 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 128 APPENDIX ➤ Index En 174 © 2013 Yamaha Corporation YF343A0/EN